Upload
others
View
15
Download
6
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Nepal Electricity Authority(A Government of Nepal Undertaking)
Distribution and Consumer Services Directorate
BIDDING DOCUMENTFOR
Design, Supply, Installation/Erection, Testing and Commissioning of11/0.4 kV Distribution System
Single-Stage, Bidding Procedure
Invitation for Bids No. : GSEEP/W/ICB-4-Package 1
IDA Cr. : Credit No. 5566-NPProject Name : Grid Solar and Energy Efficiency ProjectIssued on :…………….Employer : Nepal Electricity AuthorityCountry : Nepal
PART 2 OF 3
September 2016
The Project ManagerGrid Solar and Energy Efficiency ProjectDistribution and Consumer Service DirectorateNepal Electricity AuthorityNepalTel.: +977-1-4153145Fax.: +977-1-4153146E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
BLANK
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Acronyms
BDS Bid Data SheetCIF Cost, Insurance and FreightCIP Carriage and Insurance Paid to (named place of destination)CPM Critical Path MethodDDC District Development CommitteeDDP Delivered Duty Paid (named place of destination)EDI Electronic Data InterchangeENAA Engineering Advancement Association of JapanEXW Ex factory, ex works or ex warehouseFCA Free CarrierFIDIC Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs Conseils (International Federation
of Consulting Engineers)FOB Free on BoardGCC General Conditions of ContractIBRD International Bank for Reconstruction and DevelopmentICC International Chamber of CommerceIDA International Development AssociationIFB Invitation for BidsITB Instructions to BiddersSBD Standard Bidding DocumentSCC Special Conditions of ContractTS Technical Specifications and DrawingsUNCITRAL United Nations Commission on International Trade LawVDC Village Development Committee
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
BLANK
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
PART 2Employer's Requirement
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Single Stage Bidding
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Section VI. Employer's Requirement for Distribution System
Table of Contents
Section VI A. Scope of Supply of Plant and Installation Services by the Contractor...... VI A-1
Section VI B. Specification ...............................................................................................VI B-1Chapter 1: Construction Unit/Technical Preambles .........................................................VI B1-1Chapter 2: Technical Specification ..................................................................................VI B2-1Chapter 3: Inspection, Testing and Commissioning ........................................................VI B3-1Chapter 4: Technical Data Sheet ......................................................................................VI B4-1Chapter 5: Construction Standards....................................................................................VI B5-1Chapter 6: Special Requirements for Execution of Works ...............................................VI B6-1
Section VI C Forms & ProcedureForm of Completion Certificate………………………………………..…… ..................VI C-1Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate.....................................................................VI C-2Change Order Procedure and Forms .................................................................................VI C-3Change Order Procedure ...................................................................................................VI C-4Annex 1. Request for Change Proposal.............................................................................VI C-Annex 2. Estimate for Change Proposal ...........................................................................VI C-Annex 3. Acceptance of Estimate…... ..............................................................................VI C-Annex 4. Change Proposal ................................................................................................VI C-Annex 5. Change Order.....................................................................................................VI C-Annex 6. Pending Agreement Change Order ....................................................................VI C-Annex 7. Application for Change Proposal.......................................................................VI C-
Section VI D. Drawings .................................................................................................. VI D-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
BLANK
Section VI A : Employers Requirement and Specification VI A-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Section VI A.
Scope of Supply of Plant and Installation Services by theContractor
1. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
1.1. General
These Bidding Documents cover the design, supply, installation/erection,commissioning, testing and handover of 11 and 0.4 kV distribution lines,distribution transformers and all the necessary structural, mechanical and electricalworks, facilities as mentioned, specified or referred to in the technicalspecifications and Schedules of Rates and Prices (Bill of quantities).
1.2 Equipment and Materials
All equipment and materials shall be delivered by the Contractor to his designatedstore area. Such material shall be delivered, unloaded and placed in stores in anacceptable manner and approved by the Employer or his authorized representative.
1.3 Erection
When the supply and installation of distribution system has been completed andaccepted by the Employer, the Contractor will make an inventory of the assemblieserected and submit it to the Employer for approval and final payment.
Before the Taking-Over of the work, the Contractor shall clean up all areas inwhich he has worked, place all unused materials in the designated stores and settleany claims, which may have resulted from his work and occupancy of the area. Heshall then remove all equipment, vehicles, manpower and facilities, which he hasbrought in, except those which may be specifically exempt by the Employer.
1.4 Scope of Work
Under the project, distribution system will be expanded by constructing new 11/0.4kV electrical lines, installation of transformers and also upgrading of existingpoles, conductors and transformers in the following districts of Nepal. Scope ofwork of the project has mentioned in the following Table 1.
a) Kapilbastu,b) Gulmi,c) Arghakhanchi
Section VI A : Employers Requirement and Specification VI A-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Table 1 : Scope of Work
New Line Extension
S.No. DistrictsDescriptions
HT(km)
LT(km)
Trans.Nos.
1 Gulmi 138 175 482 Arghakhachi 134 140 583 Kapilbastu (Krishnanagar) 28.5 20 284 Kapilbastu (Taulihawa) 32.5 40 26
Total 333 375 160
All designs, supply of equipments & materials and construction/erection will becarried out by the contractor in a single responsibility basis. All engineering designand materials shall be subjected to the Employer/Employer's Representative priorapproval.
1.5 Contract Scope:
The Contractor shall carry out the survey in the VDC's of below mentioneddistricts in coordination with the Project and shall produce drawings with layout ofproposed 11 kV & 400/230 volt electrical network and location of distributiontransformers for the purpose of distribution network augmentation and expansion.
VDC's to be electrified
Arghakhachi District1. Hansapur 2. Bangi 3. Gokhunga 4. Khandanda 5. Thada6. Simalpani 7. Siddhara 8. Jukena 9. Jaluke 10. Sitapur11. Suwarnakhal 12. Durgaphat 13. Khidim 14. Pokharathok 15. Parena
16. Chidika 17. Belkot 18. Patauti 19. Pali 20. Aadguri21. Maidan 22. Dhatibang 23. Argha 24. Dibharna 25. Wangla26. Dhikura 27. Nuwakot 28. Sandhikharka
Gulmi District1. Marbhung 2. Darlamchaur 3. Purkot daha 4. Mayalpokhari 5. Malayagiri6. Bajkateri 7. Aglung 8. Wagla 9. Sirseni 10. Doholi11. Ismarajasthal 12. Chapahile 13. Pipaldhara 14. Hadhade 15. Bhanbhane16. Jaisithok 17. Nayagau 18. Arkhabang 19. Hwangdi 20. Darlin21. Neta 22. Poudi Amarai 23. Resunga 24. Goudakot 25. Birbas26. Lumcha 27. Baletaskar 28. RidiKapilbastu District - Taulihawa1. Kapilbastu 2. Singhakhor 3. Dumra 4. Patariya 5. Lawani6. Dohani 7. Basantapur 8. Dharmapaniya 9. Bithuwa 10. Hathihawa11. Nandanagar 12. Pakadi
Section VI A : Employers Requirement and Specification VI A-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Kapilbastu District – Krishnanagar1.Krishnanagar 2. Suganagar 3. Shivraj na.pa. 4. Dhankauli 5.Bijgaurichowk6. Chaipurwa 7. Rajpur 8.Mohabbatnagar 9. Gugauli-1 10. Jawabairat11.Madhnagara 12.Shivgadi 13. Dubiya 14.Rangai 15.Bankasbasa16.Kajarahawa 17.Unwaliya 18.Pathardehiya 19.Jagadishpur
Other VDCs, towns, places of above mentioned district as directed by the owner'srepresentative.
The scope of works under this contract shall consist of but not limited to thefollowing:
1. Survey for line route and staking.
2. Preparation of drawings for laying out of lines and installation ofdistribution transformers.
3. Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of lines anddistribution transformers (on turnkey basis) as hereunder:
S.No. Description Quantity
A. Line Constructioni 100 sqmm AAAC Covered Conductor (cct-km ) 253
ii 50 sqmm AAAC Covered Conductor (cct-km ) 80
iii 4x95 sq. mm ABC Cable 130
iv 4x50 sq. mm ABC Cable 182
v 4x25 sq. mm ABC Cable 63
B. Installation of New Distribution Transformersi 11/0.4 kV, 25 kVA (Nos.) 27
ii 11/0.4 kV, 50 kVA (Nos.) 84
iii 11/0.4 kV, 100 kVA (Nos.) 49
Due to any circumstances, if the quantities estimated for above mentioned placesfound to be in excess/less during pre-construction survey, then the project willprovide name of other places, VDCs for construction of lines, augmentation ofconductors and transformers.
Variation in Quantities of Work
The Quantities listed in the Schedule of Rates and Prices represent the estimatedquantities for tender purpose only. The Contractor shall carryout pre-constructionsurvey and detail design and shall submit final bill of quantity. The actual requiredquantity may vary from the quantity as listed in Schedules of Rates and Prices. TheContractor agrees to make no claim for anticipated profits or for alleged lossesbecause of any difference between the quantities actually furnished and installedand the estimated quantities as indicated in these Bidding Documents.
Section VI A : Employers Requirement and Specification VI A-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Payment will be made as per actually furnished and installed quantities/facilities.
4. 11 kV line construction including installation of cross arms and brackets,bracings, channels, fitting of insulators and hardware, erection of stay sets,stay wires and stringing of ACSR conductor.
5. 400/230 Volt ABC Cable Installation work with all the necessary hardwareand fittings.
6. 11/0.4 kV Transformer installation including fitting of platform, installationof lighting arresters, drop out fuse cut outs, equipment earthing, and L.V.distribution panel board with L.V. cable work with end termination.
7. Testing and commissioning of all installations of above.
8. Preparation of as-built drawing after the completion of construction worksfor submission to the Project.
9. Handing over of the installation to the Project after completion.
10. Services during warranty period.
All Construction materials required to carry out these works shall be provided bythe Contractor.
All works described herein and other works necessary to complete the job forproper coordination and operation, even if not stated, shall be within the scope ofthe Contractor’s work and the cost of such works shall be considered to beincluded in the bid price.
The Contractor shall have adequate manpower to execute the works at all the 3sites simultaneously to complete the work within the scheduled time.
1.6 Specific construction materials selected for the Rural Electrification Works:
1.6.1 Folding Steel tubular poles and PSC poles have been selected to use as polestructures.
1.6.2 All Aluminium Alloy Conductor (AAAC) of 100 sq.mm and 55 sqmm has beenselected for extension of electrification network of 11 kV lines.
1.6.3 ABC cable of 25 sq.mm, 50 sq.mm and 95 sqmm has been selected for low voltage(400 Volt) distribution lines
Section VI A : Employers Requirement and Specification VI A-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
1.6.4 Galvanized steel materials have been used for fabrication of cross arms, bracing,transformer platforms, stay sets, stay wires, nut bolts, insulator spindles and earthelectrodes.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Section VI B.Specifications
1. General
1.1 These Standard Specifications, together with the Construction Standards, shallgovern the performance of the Works and shall be the basis for inspection andacceptance of the Work by the Project.
1.2 The Standard Specifications and the Construction Standards shall be considered asmutually inclusive, and the conditions stated in each shall supplement the other asappropriate.
1.3 All Standard Specifications shall be followed at all times by the Contractor unlessspecifically accepted in writing by the Project, or unless some aspects of the workcovered by these General Specifications are not required by the Scope of Work.
2. Route of Circuits
2.1 To the greatest extent practicable, all overhead circuits should be located alongstreets or travelled ways ordained by the Municipality & Village DevelopmentCommittee or required authority as public property, except as required for Servicedrops and circuits to individual consumers.
2.2 To the greatest extent practicable, all facilities should be located on publicproperty, and in no case shall private property be occupied unless specificallyauthorized by the Project. The Project shall obtain any required permits foroccupancy of public or private Right-of-Way.
3. Survey and Staking
3.1 All structures should be located at the outer limits of public property along streetsor travelled ways. Structures should also be located along streets at property linesof adjacent private property. Structures and stays running parallel or perpendicularto the line route shall not block portions of streets, travelled ways, drives, passages,or gates.
3.2 All structures shall be so located as to reduce, to the greatest extent practicable,obstacles to pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Barriers shall be provided inaccordance with instructions by the employer. As far as practicable, transformerstructures shall be located to reduce visual and noise impact on adjacent residencesor businesses.
3.3 Where underground facilities are indicated by surface conditions, or where suchfacilities can be located, structures and stays shall be so located as to avoid conflictwith such facilities during construction.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.4 All structure and stay lead locations shall be staked. At points of Intersection (P.I.)of tangent line sections, steel rebar stakes shall be used to locate the P.I. Aminimum of two (2) side sightings will be made at each P.I to permit re-location ofP.I. in the event of stake removal. All structure locations in tangent line sectionsshall be staked.
3.5 All distances between structures, and other necessary measurements of length,shall be measured to accuracy, of 0.1 metre and all angles shall be determined bytransit to an accuracy of 0.1 decimal degree. All elevations shall be measured to anaccuracy of 0.1 metre by means acceptable to the Project.
3.6 All measuring and staking activity shall be accomplished by personnel withexperience in survey procedures, and standard survey equipment acceptable to theemployer, shall be used to perform the survey work. Field survey notes coveringall survey work shall be produced and maintained and shall be turned over to theProject at the time of completion of the Works. The format of proposed surveynotes shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
3.7 Survey work shall include centre line and structure location and staking;determination of overhead and side clearings of other structures, wires, andobstacles; area surveys and plotting; and centre-line profiles of terrain; as directedby the Project.
4. Technical Documentation
4.1 All technical documentation as specified herein shall be prepared by theContractor. The Contractor shall employ skilled drafting personnel to produce alldocumentation specified. All technical documentation prepared by the Contractorshall be subject to the approval of the Project prior to acceptance by the Project ofsuch documentation. All technical documentation shall be prepared in the Englishlanguage.
4.2 Documentation shall be prepared using the following mediums:
a) Mylar material, with a minimum thickness of 0.127 millimeters, shall be usedto produce the base Structure Data Sheet, As-Built Drawings and otherdrawings specified by the Project.
b) Standard drafting vellum shall be used to produce small area plotting, profilesof line-sections and centre-line plotting necessary for the development ofStructure Data Sheets and As-built Drawings.
4.3 Structure Data Sheets (SDS) shall be prepared in accordance with the F1 formatcontained in Volume 2, Section X. Structure Data Sheets shall be prepared by theContractor showing his proposed construction details for erection of facilities inaccordance with the Construction Standards. The SDS shall be prepared after thecentre-line survey and staking is completed, for any line section designated byProject, and shall be submitted to Project for approval prior to any construction of
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
the facilities shown in SDS. Submission of SDS for approval shall be in the formof A3 photocopy in clearly legible copy. Any unclear or illegible form entry orreproduction shall be rejected. Project may require any revisions to be made, attheir sole discretion, prior to approval of the SDS for construction. An approvedand field checked SDS is required for all Construction Units invoiced by theContractor. Field checking of the SDS shall be performed jointly by the Contractorand Project representative. The SDS and As Built Plan are intended as permanentrecords for Project. Any construction performed prior to the Contractor’s receipt ofapproved SDS from Project shall be completely at the Contractor's risk, andProject shall have the right to require any correction due to the un-approvedconstruction activities.
4.4 As-Built Drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor in the general formatprovided by the Project. Drawing size shall be approximately 841 x 597 mmoverall and the scale shall be 1:10,000, 1:2,000. The Project shall provide anyavailable environmental background data for inclusion on the various drawings andthe Contractor shall record (in ink) all facilities as-built.
4.5 The Contractor shall prepare other technical drawings, in the same medium andformat as the As-Built Drawings, for As-Built Drawings index sheets, pole maps,and One-Line Diagrams as specified and required by the Project.
4.6 The Contractor shall and prepare and furnish Transformer Record documents, inthe format specified by the Project, for each transformer installed.
5. Material Storage
5.1 The Contractor shall procure all materials and equipment for the work. TheContractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and vehicles to load and transportsaid materials and equipment to the Contractor storage facilities and worksites asrequired. All materials and equipment turned in to the Project reclaimed afterdemolition of existing facilities if any shall be transported to the Project warehouseand unloaded in the same manner.
5.2 Worksite
a) Extended storage of materials along the routes of lines will not be permitted.All small items of material shall be provided to the work crews on a dailybasis and no small items of materials may be stored on the worksite overnight.
b) Transformers, ABC cable and conductor reels may be spotted at the worksitesfor a short period prior to installation provided that crating and reel laggingare intact to protect the items. Poles may be spotted at structure locations forshort periods prior to setting.
c) All poles, transformers, ABC cable and conductor placed at the worksitesshall be located so that the items are not subject to damage and do not impedepedestrian or vehicular traffic.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
d) Any damage caused by imprudent placement of equipment and materials bythe Contractor at the worksites shall be corrected by the Contractor, in amanner acceptable to the Project, at the Contractor's cost.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5.3 Contractor Storage Facility
a) The Contractor shall be financially responsible for the secure and properstorage of materials to prevent loss or damage to any materials.
b) Any items of material and equipment contained in degradable packaging shallbe stored under roof and protected from moisture. Other materials, except asspecified in subparagraph (c) below shall be stored and covered in a well-drained level area, free from accumulation of surface water.
c) Transformers, disconnecting switches, and reels of ABC cable may be storedoutdoors in a well-drained, level area free from accumulation of surface water.Reels of ABC cable may be stacked on reel sides not more than three (3) reelshigh. ABC cable reels shall be placed on Wood pallets, wood lagging, or well-graveled level surface.
d) Packaged items of material and equipment shall not be uncrated, or havepackaging removed, prior to installation. The Contractor shall exercise duecaution and care in the transportation, storage, and handling of all materialswhich are to be provided by the Project. Equipment consisting of, orcontaining, porcelain insulation should be transported and handled to avoidcracks or chipping. Lagging or other protection shall not be removed fromABC cable reels until the cable is to be installed.
e) The ends of installed cables shall be sealed immediately after being cut with anon-absorbent covering fastened around the outer jacket.
6. Excavations
6.1 All excavations made for the installation, or demolition, of facilities shall beaccomplished in a timely manner according to the scheduled installation. Requiredexcavations shall be opened, material installed, and backfill placed, as specified, ina continuing operation to the greatest extent practicable.
6.2 Any excavation left open during discontinuous construction which is accessible tothe public or along public thoroughfare, shall be covered or barricaded, andmarked by suitable visual means, to prevent a public hazard.
6.3 Excavations shall be properly located and sized for the intended use. Pole and stayplate/ anchor excavations shall be correctly sized to retain undisturbed soil to thegreatest extent consistent with the means of excavation. Pole holes shall be madeby power-driven auger or by manual methods; power-driven shovel equipmentshall not be used. Pole holes shall be excavated to the specified depth with notolerance shallow and tolerance of ten (10) centimeters deep. The bottom of poleholes shall be undisturbed soil, gravel or rock. Stay plate holes shall be excavatedby manual methods to specified depth with no disturbed soil in the direction of theanchor rod.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6.4 All excavations shall be backfilled with excavated material, or as specified for theinstallation. Backfill shall be free of foreign materials and shall be well tampedwith excess backfill graded over the excavated area to prevent depressionsresulting from eventual natural compaction. Large amounts of excess backfill shallbe removed from the site by the Contractor if so directed by employer. If sodirected by Project, The Contractor shall provide suitable backfill materials forexcavations where existing removed materials is insufficient, or inappropriate, toprovide suitable grading of the excavated area.
7. Pole Setting
7.1 Poles shall be set in accordance with the appropriate Sections of the ConstructionStandards and subparagraph 6 above.
7.2 Each pole shall be assigned a unique construction number at the time of structurestaking for preliminary identification and preparation of structure Data Sheets(SDS).
7.3 Subsequent to the preparation and approval of SDS, and prior to provisionalacceptance of a given line section, the Project shall provide the Contractor withunique permanent pole numbers. The Contractor shall then apply the specifiedpermanent pole numbers to each pole with black oil-based paint in neat clearEnglish letters and/or Arabic numerals. Permanent pole numbers shall be appliedin letters/numerals five (5) centimetres in height at a point on the pole 1.6 metersabove ground level. Numbers shall be applied on the side of the pole facing theadjacent street or travelled way.
8. Safety
8.1 The Contractor shall take all measures required to safeguard the public, public andprivate property from any hazard to life, limb, or property which may arise duringthe performance of the construction of the works. Such measures shall include, butnot be limited to: barricades, signs, newspaper announcements, traffic control bypolice, or other advisory and control methods deemed appropriate.
8.2 The Contractor shall provide his work force with all tools and equipment insufficient numbers and quality to perform all aspects of the works in a safe manner.The Contractor shall provide protective headgear for all members of his workforce,and shall provide protective clothing as required for specific tasks. The Contractorshall instruct his work force in proper and safe construction techniques and shallcontinuously monitor compliance with safety instructions throughout the period ofthe Contract.
8.3 The Contractor shall provide, and require use of, protective grounding equipmentwhen:
a) Work is being performed on lines adjacent, either in extension of, or parallelto, energized circuits.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
b) Work is being performed on isolated circuits after conductors have beeninstalled.
8.4 The Contractor shall maintain all tools and equipment in good working order. Allmechanized equipment shall have adequate safety mechanisms and guards in placeand be fully operational. Operators of such equipment shall be skilled and fullytrained in the operation of such equipment.
8.5 The Contractor shall provide and maintain emergency medical supplies to coverwith accidents and snakebites for his work force on a readily available basis. TheContractor shall also instruct all supervisory personnel in the action to be taken inthe event of serious injury, and the sources and locations of professional medicalassistance which shall be employed in such cases.
8.6 The Contractor shall apply all accidental insurance policies to his work force for anaccident occurring during the working period of the construction.
9. Tests
9.1 The Contractor shall furnish the electrical test equipment and personnel to performelectrical tests of equipment and circuits, as specified by, and under the supervisionof the Project.
9.2 The Contractor shall megger all circuits installed with a motor-driven megger orequivalent instrument to demonstrate the acceptable insulation characteristics ofthe line prior to energization and Provisional Acceptance.
9.3 The Contractor shall megger all transformers with a motor-driven megger prior toinstallation
9.4 All tests specified shall be conducted during suitable atmospheric conditions underthe supervision and witness of the Project. All test results shall be documented andsigned by both parties.
10. Demolition
10.1 The Contractor shall perform the removal of all existing facilities, if any, inaccordance with the specific directions of the Employer. All materials removedshall remain the property of Project and the Contractor shall deliver all salvagedmaterials to the Project warehouse, or as specifically directed by the Employer.
10.2 All poles shall be removed by pulling the complete pole from the ground; polesshall not be cut off at the ground line. Holes shall be backfilled and compactedcompletely with sufficient added backfill piled above grade to prevent depressionsbeing created by natural compaction. Backfill material shall be provided by theContractor.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
10.3 All conductor materials removed shall be returned to the Project. Methods ofconductor removal shall be specified by the Project. If conductor is removed in thelongest length practicable for future re-use, the said conductor shall be wound onempty conductor reels, with the reels marked with the conductor size andapproximate length. Different conductor sizes shall not be mixed on any reel. Ifconductor is removed from structures and specified as scrap, conductors may becut down in lengths and made up in rolls. Conductor sizes for scrapping may bemixed; different conductor metals shall be separated.
10.4 Care shall be taken in removing, handling, and transporting cutouts, and surgearresters to minimize porcelain damage.
10.5 Transformers removed from service shall be delivered to the Project warehouse oras specifically directed by the Employer. Care shall be taken in removing, lifting,and transporting transformers.
10.6 Other structures shall be removed, such as concrete transformer pedestals in themost appropriate manner, as specified by the Project. Existing stay rods may be cut20 centimeters below finished ground level.
11. Cleanup
11.1 The Contractor shall ensure that all worksites shall be free of all manner of debrisresulting from the construction activity.
11.2 All crating, ABC cable and conductor reels, packaging materials, conductor scraps,and other miscellaneous items are removed from the workplace. All holes resultingfrom removal of facilities shall be filled. If trees or bush have been cut or trimmed,all cuttings shall be removed. The worksites shall be left in clean naturalconditions.
11.3 Site cleanup shall be an integral part of the Provisional Acceptance process, and noline section shall be provisionally accepted unless all cleanup work has beenaccomplished.
12. Tree Cutting and Trimming
12.1 Any tree cutting or tree trimming authorized and directed shall be accomplished bythe Contractor under the direct supervision of Project.
12.2 All cutting shall be removed by the Contractor with disposition of cutting asspecified by Project.
13. Interruptions to Existing Service
13.1 The Contractor shall arrange for interruptions of service to existing lines withProject. Every effort shall be made to limit such interruptions to the minimum.
Section VI B : Employers Requirement and Specification VI B-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
13.2 If it is possible to maintain service to a section of line by constructing temporaryfacilities approved by Project, the Contractor shall detail man hours andclassification of personnel required to construct such facilities and submit toProject for approval prior to any work being performed. Payment for approvedwork shall be based on the rates covered in Construction Unit LR of Section VIII,Volume 2.
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
CHAPTER-1
CONSTRUCTION UNIT/ TECHNICALPREAMBLES
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
CHAPTER-1CONSTRUCTION UNIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SL.No. Subject Page No.
1. Structure Data Sheet (SDS) 1-1
2. General Information 1-3
3. Definitions of Construction Units 1-4
3.1 Unit 1 Plan Profile Drawings 1-4
3.2 11-1 11 kV Supports, Insulators and Hardware 1-7
3.3 11-2 11 kV Conductor & Accessories 1-8
3.4 Definition of Construction unit 11-3, 0.4-3
Stays and Anchor 1-9
3.5 11/0.4-1 Transformer Installation 1-10
3.6 0.4-1 0.4 kV Supports 1-11
3.7 0.4-2 0.4 kV ABC Cable & Hardware 1-12
3.8 LR- Labor Rates 1-13
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
CONSTRUCTION UNIT
1. STRUCTURE DATA SHEET (SDS)
Pursuant to Specification, Clause 4.0, Chapter-5 Structure Data Sheets (SDS) shall beprepared to provide details of specific construction information necessary for erection ofpole structures with hardware and accessories and conductor installation. The SDS shall beused in conjunction with the area plan drawing to document the works to be performed. Asample copy of the SDS format is contained in Chapter 6.Abbreviations used in the preparation of SDS shall be defined as follows,
SI. No. Nomenclatures Meaning
a. Pole ConstructionNo.
Number assigned by the Contractor to identify pole on Plandrawing.
b. Span Length of conductor span between poles
c. BK Angle of line deflection in degrees
d. Pole Pole quantity
e. Frame The Construction Standard Drawing No. for 11 kV system forwhich the pole is to be framed e.g. CS11-02. The ConstructionStandard Drawing No. for 400 volt system for which the poleis to be framed e.g. CSLV-01.
f. Stay The Construction Standard Drawing No. of stay to be installedin different voltage system, e.g., CSG-08.
g. Transformer The Construction Standard Drawing No. for which thetransformer installation is to be framed e.g. CSLV-07.
h. Conductor The number and size of conductors in sq. mm in 11 kVsystem, e.g. 3-100 sq mm.
i. Conductor (km.) Running km. length of conductor.
j. STSA Single arm (SA) No Deviation 0-7 degk. STSA1 Single arm (SA) Low Angle 8-15 degl.
DTDADouble Tower Double Arm (DTDA) Medium Angle 16-30deg (2 nos. in 1 set)
m. HS H-structure (HS) (2 nos. in 1 set) High Angle Above 30degn. STDDE Single Tower Double Dead End Structure (STDDE)o. TO Tap-Off structure (TO)p. DE Dead End Structure (DE)q.
TR-DETransformer pole Dead End Type Structure (TR-DE) (2 nos.in 1 set)
r.TR-IN
Transformer Pole Intermediate Structure (TR-IN) (2 nos. in 1set)
s. A Single wire type stay
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
t. B Double wire type Stay
u. C Flying type stay
v. D Flying type with shorter stay lead or bow type stay
w. SA1 Single arm structure for deviation between >150 ˜30deg is tobe framed
x. A-1 Low voltage frame type A-1
y. A-2 Low voltage frame type A-2
z. B Low voltage frame type B
aa. C Low voltage frame type C
ab. E Low voltage frame type E
ac. F Low voltage frame type F
Note:a. Information for a single pole location need not be confined to a single row.b. All works, whether new or on existing systems, shall be documented on the SDS.c. Each SDS shall include the applicable "As Built" Plan Drawing number(s). Similarly
each "As Built" Plan Drawing shall include the applicable SDS number(s).
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
2. GENERAL INFORMATION:
This describes requirements of those items which have not been included in specificConstruction Unit and which are of general nature.
1. All Construction Units shall include the cost of preparation, revision andreproduction of supporting Structure Data Sheets (SDS) as per Chapter-6.
2. All Construction Units shall include the cost of cutting and painting bolt endsextending more than 30 mm beyond nut if necessary. Paint shall be Local Materialsupplied by the Contractor.
3. Construction Units 11-1 and 0.4-1 shall include the cost of preparing As Builtdrawing as per Chapter-1.
4. All construction Units shall include necessary cost for trimming and cutting of treeto clear route for new or existing works. Cutting of trees, at the earth line, shall bethe responsibility of the Contractor but RSDSRP/GSEEP shall assist to obtainnecessary permit for the same. But it does not mean the cutting trees of denseforest.
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3. DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNITS
3.1 Unit-1:- Plan-Profile Drawings
3.1.1 REFERENCE STANDARD AND SPECIFICATIONS:
1. General Specification :
2. Supplementary Conditions:
3. Standard Survey and Drafting procedure shall be used to carry out all survey and
preparation of drawings.
4. Unit: Per km
5. Activities :
Standard check survey and drafting procedure shall be used to carry out the surveyworks and preparation of drawings.
The activities of this Construction Unit shall include the preparation of stakingdrawings for sections of line specified by the GSEEP/ NEA and preparation offinal BOQ.
Check survey and staking, as specified in the contract scope, as being part of theContractor's work shall be performed in pursuant to the General Specifications.
Following points should be considered while preparing the drawing.
1. As far as possible, the proposed electric line shall follow the bank of existingroad/trail to avoid the right of way problem during construction period.
2. The rural electrification shall be planned in such a way that densely populated areaand houses along the right of way must be electrified.
3. 400/230 volts distribution line shall not exceed 2 km radial distance from thedistribution transformer.
4. The schematic diagram of 11 kV line shall show the tapping point, conductor sizeand line length, load centers. One set of Drop Out fuse set shall be included as asectionlizer at each branch tapping point of main HT Line.
3.1.2 Staking drawings shall include but shall not be limited to:
a. Distribution SystemCollection of field data and preparation of plan drawings for sections of linespecified by the Project.
Centre line survey shall include but not be limited to: Location, elevation, description and coverage of NEA existing HV/LV line and
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
communication line in the area of proposed Electrification works; Identification and fixing of HT Tapping point, load centers, beneficiary households
and HT/LT route alignment Existing Transformer of NEA utilized for LT tapping if any. Identification and fixing of pole structure during the road crossing, river crossing
and in the crossing of any other facilities like Bridges, Pipelines etc if any existedin the area of proposed Electrification.
Details of Feeder line and Households details of every identified load center Slide, slopes/cross slopes etc in the proposed route of HT/LT line. Wild Reserve area/ Forest if any in the proposed route of HT/LT line. Road/trail crossings, Canals and type of surface All buildings within 25 meters of centre line. Cultivated areas/fence lines Notations regarding areas unsuitable for pole line structures e.g. swamp, solid rock
etc; All features within 25 meters of the proposed route which are significant in
construction and maintenance of the line; Details of Construction units if differs from the Contract agreement Units.
Plan drawing shall be prepared on standard reproducible tracing paper showing thereduced levels (RLs) and chain age of each pole location/angle point in 1:2000scale.
b. Transmission Line
Collection of field data and preparation of plan and profile drawing for sections ofline specified by the GSEEP. Plan and Profile drawing shall include all the detailsspecified above.
Plan and profile drawing shall be prepared on standard plan and profile vellumwith a vertical scale of 1:200 and horizontal scale of 1:2000.
3.1.3 Contractor’s Drawing/mapping and Data
The Contractor shall provide GIS mapping of the proposed line route of HT/LTline in the forms of Mylar tracings or computer printed drawing showing the chainedge of each pole location/angle point in 1:5000 scale with electronic copy incompact disc (CD)/Pen drive/Flash Drive required for construction and recordpurposes. The required number of construction plan drawings and associated SDSsshall be at least Three (3) copies.
Checking and revising the Drawings and Structure Data Sheets if necessary, is apart of the Scope of Work of the Contractor. The contractor shall produce therevised or final drawings in accordance with the General Specifications.
Revised Line Staking Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor for the
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
approval of the NEA/Project for the execution of construction works.
The Contractor shall submit the drawings and data to GSEEP/NEA for approval.
Reproducible of all final approved drawings shall be made on Mylar films orcomputer printed drawings with computer electronic files in CD/Pen Drive/FlashDrive.
All drawings for approval and final as built drawings shall be produced in A1 andshall be bound neatly.
3.1.4 Micro Films/ Computer Electronic File (CEF)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Microfilms or computer printeddrawing with Computerized Electronic File (CEF) for all final Approved As BuiltDrawings within one (1) months after the completion of the Works.
3.1.5 Photographs of the Work
The Contractor shall provide along with the monthly progress the digitalphotographs of the work during construction and Installation of each constructionunit as and when required by the Project.
Contractors shall submit two set of photographs for each installed transformertaken from the front, rear and side before final commissioning and testing. Thephotograph shall clearly show the connection of transformer accessories likeLightening Arrester, Drop Out set, MCCB connection and jumpering to overheadline and cabling from transformer low voltage side to MCCB. Any progresspayment relating to construction unit which includes transformer shall contain withabove photographs. Bills without photographs shall not be entertained.
These photographs shall not be smaller than Post Card size and such photographinscribed with its serial number, Transformer no, Transformer location, date whentaken and a short title shall be furnished in A4 size photo album to the Owner. TheContractor shall also submit the electronic copy of the photograph to theGSEEP/NEA.
3.1.6 Structural Data Sheet
Structural Data Sheet shall be checked and prepared in such a manner that it shallshow each and every items installed in each pole and transformer platform and theactual length of each and every span.
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.2 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-1
11 kV SUPPORTS, INSULATORS AND HARDWARE
3.2.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS
1. Construction Standards : Chapter-5, Clause 2 & 5
2. Purpose:
Construction unit is for the installation of a 11 meter Steel Tubular pole and Pre-Stressed Concrete pole for 11 kV overhead line structure with cross-arms,insulators and hardware fitting complete. Unit does not include installation of stay.
3. Activities :
Transport of all materials to the site from contractor's respective warehouse,excavate pole hole, set pole, if necessary, back fill and tamp poles, compact theback filling adequately, realign, if necessary, install framing including insulatorsand hardware, provide and install local materials, if necessary, as designated by thematerial list.
4. Type of Frames:
S.No.
FrameType.
Description (Structure Type) AbbreviationConstruction StandardTubular PoleStructure 11 meter
1. 11-1.1 Single arm (SA) No Deviation 0-7 deg SA CS11-02
2. 11-1.2 Single arm (SA) Low Angle 8-15 deg SA1 CS 11-03
3. 11-1.3Double Tower Double Arm (DTDA)Medium Angle 16-30 deg (2 nos. in 1 set)
DTDA CS 11-04
4. 11-1.4H-structure (HS) (2 nos. in 1 set) High AngleAbove 30deg
HS CS 11-05
5. 11-1.5Single Tower Double Dead End Structure(STDDE)
STDDE CS 11-06
6. 11-1.6 Tap-Off structure (TO) TO CS 11-07
7. 11-1.7 Dead End Structure (DE) DE CS 11-08
8. 11-1.8Transformer pole Dead End Type Structure(TR-DE) (2 nos. in 1 set)
TR-DE CS 11-09
9. 11-1.9Transformer Pole Intermediate Structure(TR-IN) (2 nos. in 1 set)
TR-IN CS 11-10
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.3 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-2
11 kV CONDUCTOR & ACCESSORIES
3.3.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/ SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Construction Standards : Chapter-5, Clause 3, 4 & 5
2. Purpose:This Construction unit is for the installation of All Aluminum Alloy coveredconductor (AAAC) for 11 kV overhead lines. Unit is per single conductor runningkm.
3. Activities:Load, unload and transport of materials from contractor's respective warehouse tothe respective site, set up wire stringing reels, pull lines, string blocks onpoles/cross-arms, install and remove temporary guard structures, install andremove temporary structures to keep conductor from dragging on earth. Pullconductors, maintain sag and make dead end, remove conductor from stringinglocks, tie to insulators, make necessary compression joints, connections, jumpersetc.
4. Size of conductor :
11-2.1 55 sq. mm AAAC Conductor11-2.2 100 sq. mm AAAC Conductor
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-10
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.4 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11-3, 0.4-3
STAYS AND ANCHORS
3.4.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Construction Standards : Chapter-5, Clause 2D
2. Purpose :
Construction Unit is for a complete stay assembly of high strength steel wire, rod andcross plate anchor or flying stay.
3. Activities :
Transport materials to site from respective contractor’s warehouse, excavate hole,install anchor rod, backfill with gravel if specified, ramp till well compacted, installstay wire and stay insulator, attach to pole, adjust tension and further adjust tension, ifnecessary, after installation and sagging of conductor.
4. Type of Stays and Anchors:
S-No. Construction Unit No. Type of Stay Construction Standard
1. 33-3.1, 11-3.1, 0.4-3.1 Single Type A(adjustable) CSG-08
2. 33-3.2, 11-3.2, 0.4-3.2 Double Type B CSG-09
3. 33-3.3, 11-3.3, 0.4-3.3 Flying Type C CSG-10
5. Following sizes of Stay Rod and Stay Wire shall be used,
Sl. NO. Description
Type of Stay
Single Stay(A type)
Double Stay(B type)
Flying Stay(C type)
1. 19mm Dia. Stay Set (HT) 7/8 SWG 7/8 SWG 7/8 SWG
2. 16mm Dia. Stay Set (LT) 7/12 SWG 7/12 SWG 7/12 SWG
Note:a) Stay set of sl. no. 1 shall be used for 11 kV overhead line and length of stay wire
shall be 12 metre per set.
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-11
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
b) Stay set of sl. no. 2 shall be used for 0.4kV overhead line and length of stay wireshall be 9.0 metre per set.
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-12
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.5 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 11/0.4-1
TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION
3.5.1 REFERENCE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS :
1. Construction Standards Chapter-5, Clause 7
2. Purpose :Construction unit is for the installation of distribution transformer, platform cross-arms, insulators, dropout fuse cut-outs, lightning arresters, 11 kV jumpers, 400 VABC Cable Hardware and earthing set complete including excavation andbackfilling for earthing. Unit does not include installation of H-poles for support,LV panel and stays.
3. Activities :Test the transformer with the right size of megger with respect to the primary andsecondary voltage system, transport the transformer, lightning arresters, drop-outsets and related materials to site from respective warehouse of Contractor, mounttransformer on elevated platform, install LV cable between transformer LVterminals and protection panels, install all LV cables between protection panelsand outgoing LV overhead lines, including cable and jumper connections, connectLV neutral earth terminal with earth lead. Installation of Lightning Arrester withearthing and Drop Out Sets. Each earthing set shall be protected with suitable GIpipe of two and a half meters length and supplied by the bidder.
Sl. No. Construction Unit Size of Transformer
1. 11/0.4-1 25 kVA, 11/0.4 kV
2. 11/0.4-2 50 kVA, 11/0.4 kV
3. 11/0.4-3 100 kVA, 11/0.4 kV
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-13
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.6 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 0.4-10.4 kV SUPPORTS
3.6.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Construction Standards : Chapter-5, Clause 2 & 8
2. Purpose :Construction unit is for the installation of a 8 meter Steel Tubular pole and PSCpole for overhead line structure. Unit does not include installation of stays.
3. Activities :Transport materials to site from contractor's respective warehouse, excavate hole,set pole, plant pole, provide and install local materials if necessary, back fill andtamp pole till adequate compaction is reached, realign the pole if necessary. Unitincludes drilling of required holes of suitable size on pole if necessary.
SI. NoFrameType Description Type
Construction Standards
8 m Pole
1. 0.4-1.1 Suspension type A CSLV-01
2. 0.4-1.3
Suspension type with ananchor for dead B CS LV-02
3. 0.4-1.4 Four anchor dead end C CS LV-03
4. 0.4-1.5 Two anchor dead end E CS LV-04
5. 0.4-1.6 Single anchor dead end F CS LV-05
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-14
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.7 DEFINITION OF CONSTRUCTION UNIT 0.4-2
0.4 kV ABC CABLE & HARDWARE
3.7.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Construction Standards: Chapter-5, Clause 9
2. Purpose:Construction unit is for the installation of ABC Cable for 400 volt overhead lineswith ABC cable hardware fitting complete. Unit is per four core cable running km.
3. Activities:Transport materials to site from contractor's respective warehouse, set up cablestringing reels, pulling lines, stringing blocks, install and remove temporary guardstructures, if necessary, install and remove temporary structures to keep cable fromdragging on earth, if necessary. Pull cable, sag and make dead end, remove cablefrom stringing blocks, tie to hardware, make necessary joints, mount connectors,make jumpers etc. Open and reconnect service cables in case of rehabilitation ofthe ABC Cables.
Sl.No. C.U.No. Cable Size in sq. mm Purpose No. of Cable
1. 0.4-2.1 25 All Phases and Neutral 4
2. 0.4-2.2 50 All Phases and Neutral 4
3. 0.4-2.3 95 All Phases and Neutral 4
Chapter 1 Construction Unit 1-15
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.8 DEFINITION OF LABOUR RATES
3.8.1 REFERENCE STANDARD/SPECIFICTION
1. Purpose :
This Construction unit is intended to use for such work which has not been defined by aConstruction Unit. Contractor shall submit to GSEEP/NEA, along with the bid, a writtendescription of work which may have to be performed under certain situation and whichwas not foreseen during the design and study. This shall include location, number andclassification of personnel to perform the work and estimated number of hours/day perman. This unit is to be charged only upon the approval of GSEEP/NEA. This unit includesnecessary transport of equipment to perform the assigned work.
Sl. No. Designation Rate per hour or Day
1. Engineer
2. Supervisor
3. Foreman
4. Lineman/ Electrician
5. Helper
6. Skilled Labor
7. Labor/Unskilled Jyami
Note: The construction unit outlined in these sections contains general information andmay vary. The actual construction units will be as per BOQ of the financial proposal.
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
CHAPTER 2TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Chapter 2- Technical SpecificationS.P. 1.0 Steel Tubular Pole ………………….………..…………………………… ...... 2-1S.P. 2.0 Pre-Stressed Concrete Pole…………………………………………… 2-6S.P. 3.0 AAAC Conductors ..…………………………………………………………2-11S.P. 4.0 Self supporting LV Aerial bundled conductors (ABC) Cable …………… 2-15S.P. 5.0 Silicon Steel Core Type Distribution Transformer …………..…………..…… 2-27S.P. 6.0 Distribution Cutout & Surge Arrestor …………………..…………………… 2-38S.P. 7.0 Fuse Link …………………………….…………………..………………… 2-52S.P. 8.0 Moulded Close Circuit Breakers ……………………………………………….2-53S.P. 9.0 Distribution Panel Board ……………………………………………………… 2-63S.P. 10.0 Porcelain Insulator ……..…………………..……..………………………….. 2-67S.P. 11.0 Insulator Pin ………………………………………………………………….. 2-71S.P. 12.0 Disc Insulator Fittings (Tension set and Back Strap)………………………… 2-74S.P. 13.0 Stay Set…………………………..……….…………………......................... 2-77S.P. 14.0 Stranded Stay wire…………………………………….……………………… 2-81S.P. 15.0 Galvanized steel bolts, nuts & miscellaneous
fastening components……………………………………………….............2-83S.P. 16.0 Performed wire products …………………….…..…..….…………………… 2-85S.P. 17.0 Grand Rods & Clamp …….………………………………………………….. 2-87S.P. 18.0 Grounding Conductors …………………….…..…..….……………………… 2-89S.P. 19.0 Banding materials and tools ………………………………………………….. 2-91S.P. 20.0 Compression Connectors & Compression Tools ……………………… 2-93S.P. 21.0 Crossarms & Bracing Angle ………………….…..…..….……………… 2-96S.P. 22.0 Flat Crossarm Brace ………….………………………………………… 2-99S.P. 23.0 Transformer Platforms ….…………………….…..…..….…………………. 2-101S.P. 24.0 Pole Clamp …………………….………………………………………… 2-104S.P. 25.0 Technical Specification fitting for HV overhead, XLPE cover conductor 2-106
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
GENERAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Ambient temperature -50 C to 550 C
2. Altitude up to 2000 m above MSL
3. Humidity 99% (max.)
4. System voltage 11 kV, 400/230 V
5. System frequency 50 Hz
Note: The variation of frequency and voltage for design and operation is as per actualsystem operation i.e. ± 5 %.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 1.0 STEEL TUBULAR POLE
1. Scope1.1 This Specification covers the design, fabrication, testing and supply of tubular steel
poles commonly used in overhead electric lines.
2. GeneralThe steel pole shall be fabricated in several lengths and strengths as specified inTable 1 contained herein.
2.1 The steel tubular poles must be manufactured by a company approved to qualitystandard ISO 9001:2000. The ISO 9001 certification number, the name of theauthorized approving authority with the contact address and telephone and faxnumbers shall also be stated. The Bidder shall enclose a copy of the ISO 9001certificate with the bid.
3. Description
3.1 The steel poles shall be of swagged design and shall consist of three (3) separatelengths of steel tubing swagged at two joints to fabricate the poles. However, thereare some numbers of poles as mentioned in the price and delivery schedule whichshall be of folding type. The quantities of such folding poles shall be intimated at thetime of contract.
3.2 The steel tubing used in pole fabrication shall be of steel of any approved processpossessing a minimum tensile strength of 42 kg/sq. mm and a chemicalcomposition of not more than 0.06% sulphur and not more than 0.06%phosphorous.
3.3 The tubing diameter and tubing wall thickness shown in Table 1 for each length ofpole are the minimum size to be used in fabricating each length of pole. It shall bethe responsibility of the Bidder to determine the adequacy of the component tubingshown for the load to be sustained. However, in no case the tubing diameter andwall thickness for any component tube be less than the value shown in Table 1.
3.4 Tubular poles shall be made of welded tubes, swagged and joined together. Theupper edge of each joint shall be chamfered at an angle of about 45-degree. Thesteel poles shall be composed of three sections of diminishing diameters andminimum diameter thickness and lengths of pole shall be as shown in Table 1.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3.5 All tubes forming parts of the above supports shall be made from hot insulatedseamless or continuously welded steel in accordance with BS 6323 or equivalentapplicable Standards.
3.6 The entire section of the poles shall be galvanized with minimum coating of weightnot less than 460-gm/-sq. m internally and externally.
3.7 Each pole shall be provided with a steel top plate 3-mm minimum thicknesswelded to the end of the section. The top plate shall not project beyond theperimeter of the top section. Each pole shall also be provided with a welded baseplate welded to the bottom of the pole.
3.8 The pole shall, be drilled in accordance with the drilling patterns as defined in theFigure. All the holes shall be of 18 mm dia. However, the manufacturer must getapproval of the drilling pattern before manufacturing the poles. Each pole shall bemarked with the appropriate length as shown in Figure.
3.9 The folding type of poles shall be fabricated in such a way that the section piecescan be carried to the site and fitted on the site itself. The pole section on top shallhave a flange and the section under it shall overlap to a length of 25 cm as shownin the diagram. The poles shall be drilled in such a way that the section in topcould be securely fixed the section under it by two bolts of 5/8" x 7" at 90 degreeeach other. Two such joints form a complete pole of three sections as shown in Fig2 and 3.
3.10 The size of the base plate shall be as per governing standard.
4 Tolerance
4.1 The following tolerances shall be maintained:
a) Tolerance of diameter: Not Applicableb) Tolerance on weight: Not Applicablec) Tolerance on thickness: Not Applicablee) Straightness: The finished poles shall not be out of straightness
by more than 1/600 of the height.5. Tests5.1. The following test (s) shall be performed for the pole furnished. All testing shall be
fully documented and certified test reports shall be provided to NEA.
a Tensile test and chemical analysis for sulphur and phosphorousb. Deflection testc. Permanent set testd. Drop test
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5.2 Number of poles selected for conducting tensile test and chemical analysis forsulphur and phosphorous shall be as given below:
Lot Size No. of polesUp to 500 1501 to 1000 21001 to 2000 32001 to 3000 43001 and above 5
5.3 Number of poles selected or conducting deflection test, permanent set test and droptest shall be as given below:
Lot Size No. of polesUp to 500 5501 to 1000 81001 to 2000 132001 to 3000 183001 and above 20
The deflection test, permanent set test and drop test shall be conducted insuccession on each of the poles selected.
5.4 Deflection TestEach pole shall be rigidly supported for a distance from the butt end equal to thedepth which it is to be planted in the ground. It shall then be loaded as cantileverand the appropriate deflection load of Table applied at right angles of the axis ofpole 30 cm from the top of the poles up to 9 m ( overall ) and 60 cm from the topfor poles over 9 m ( overall). For convenience in testing, the pole may be fixedhorizontally and the load applied vertically. The temporary deflection due to theapplied load at the point of application of load shall not exceed 157.5 mm.
5.5 Permanent Set TestThis test shall be carried out immediately after the deflection test. After applicationof proper load specified in Table 1 the permanent set measured from the zeroposition after the release of the appropriate applied load at the point of applicationof the load shall not exceed 13 mm.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5.6 Drop TestThe test shall be made in the case of swagged poles. The pole shall be droppedvertically with the butt end (bottom end) downwards, three times in successionfrom a height of 2 m on to a hardwood block 150 mm thick laid on concretefoundation. The pole shall not show any signs of telescoping or loosening of joints.
5.7 Should of any of the poles selected fail to pass any of the tests specified above twofurther poles shall be selected for testing from the same lot in respect of eachfailure. Should both these additional poles fail, the test material represented by thetest samples shall be deemed as not complying with these specifications.
6.0 Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001:2000;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentations7.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing
standards for selections of steel tubings, and any standard followed in thefabrication and testing of the poles offered.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a description and certified dimensional drawings of eachtype of pole.
7.3 Two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests performed on similar type of polesand similar working loads otherwise the bid offer shall be rejected. The type test
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
must have been carried out in recognized national or international testinglaboratory or independent testing laboratory other than manufacturer.
7.4 A clause-by-clause commentary of specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Table 1Poles specifications
IS Designation 410SP- 52 410 SP-43 410 SP-31 410 SP-13
Overall Length 11 m 10 m 9 m 9m 8 m 8m
Planting depth. m 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.5
Sections:
Length, m
Top (h1) 2.7 2.4 2 1.75
Middle (h2) 2.7 2.4 2 1.75
Bottom (h3) 5.6 5.2 5 4.50
Outside Diameter, mm
Top (h1) 114.3 114.3 114.3 88.9
Middle (h2) 139.7 139.7 139.7 114.3
Bottom (h3) 165.1 165.1 165.1 139.7
Thickness, mm
Top (h1) 3.65 3.65 3.65 3.25
Middle (h2) 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.65
Bottom (h3) 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
Approximate weight, kg 175 160 147 101
Crippling load, kgf 307 348 367 301
Application of load from
top of pole, m 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P.2.0 PRE STRESSED CONCRETE POLE
1. ScopeThese specifications apply to design, manufacture, and testing of rectangular pre-stressed concrete poles for use in electrical distribution.
2. Description2.1 The pre-stressed concrete pole shall be designed and fabricated in full compliance
with IS: 1678-1978, or latest revision thereof or any other national or internationalstandards that ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentionedabove, will also be acceptable.
3. Load3.1 The working loads of various pole categories are given in Table 1. The design
ultimate strength shall be calculated using a safety factor of 2.5. Pole Attributes arelisted in Table 2.
4. Design4.1 The poles shall be as per following design parameters and the dimensions shall be
as shown in Drawing. 1-4.
Design Parameters:Concrete mix: M400Minimum diameter of pre-stressing wire: 7.9 mm (7/2.6mm) for 11m and 4 mm
for 9mNo. Of pre-stressing wire: 8 nos for 11m and 4 nos for 9mWorking Load: Refer Table 1Depth of Plantation: Refer Table 2Point of Application of Load: Refer Table 2
Further design details are given in Drawings.
4.2 The minimum strength of concrete in the pole shall meet the requirements laiddown in IS:1343-1960 and IS:456-1964 or in any other equivalent national orinternational standards.
4.3 The strands shall be made from cold-drawn non-alloy steel (high carbon content)wires. The seven-wire strand consists of a group of wires arranged in strandedformation and shall have the following properties. The seven-wire strands shallconfirm to IS:6006-1983, or latest revision thereof or any other equivalent nationalor international standards.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Geometrical Properties:
Overall length 11m 8mType of material: Seven-wire strand Single strandMinimum diameter of strand: 7.9 mm (7/2.6mm) 4 mmMinimum cross-sectional areaof strands: 37.4 mm2 12.56 mm2
Mechanical Properties:
Nominal mass of strand: 294 g/m 89.9 g/mMinimum breaking load: 64.50 kN 21.54 kN0.2% proof load : 54.70 kN
Long Term Behaviour:
Maximum relaxation after 1000 h of operation at initial load equivalent to 60%,70% and 80% of breaking load shall not be higher than 1.0%, 2.5% and 4.5%respectively.
4.4 The pre-stressing strands shall be accurately positioned and satisfactorily protectedagainst the formation of rust or other corrosion prior to the placement of theconcrete. All prestressing strands shall be free from loose rust, dirt, grease, oil andother lubricants or substance that might impair their bond with the concrete.
4.5 The cement employed shall be the Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC), which shallconform to the chemical and physical requirements as set forth in BS: 12, or anyother equivalent national or international standards.
4.6 The amount of concrete cover on the outside of the pre-stressed reinforcementshall be not less than 20mm.
4.7 The pole shall include cast-in holes. Typical hole patterns are shown in thedrawings. Hole patterns must be confirmed with the NEA prior to manufacture.
4.8 All poles shall be unpolished but free of roughness, chips, excess cements, andother surface irregularities. All poles shall present a straight and symmetricalappearance after erection. The corners of all the poles shall be rounded so that theydo not present a dangerously sharp edge, which could cause tearing or excessivewearing of safety belts.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
4.9 All poles shall be provided with lifting hooks at two points for loading andunloading of poles.
Table 1: Working Load
S.No.Pole Length
(m)Design Load
(kgf)1 8 1502 9 2003 11 350
5) Tests
Definition of various types of loads:
Working load = Expected LoadDesign Working Load = Expected Load x Factor of Safety (FOS)Ultimate Transverse Load (UTL) = Load when applied at specified point of thepole, the failure occurs.Minimum Ultimate Transverse Load (MUTL) = Load when applied at specifiedpoint of the pole, the first crack appears.Design Transverse Load (DTL) = Design Working LoadDesign Ultimate Transverse Load (DUTL) = Design load at the transversedirection at which the first crack expected to appear (given by the Designer aftercalculation)The Design Ultimate Transverse Load (DUTL) is less or equal to UltimateTransverse Load
5.1.1 Transverse Strength Test
The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to thespecified planting depth. The load shall be applied at a point specified in Table 2from the top of the pole and shall be steadily and gradually increased to the designtransverse load until the occurrence of the first crack.
The deflection is then measured. Prior to the application of the design transverseload there shall be no crack. The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-10
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
gradually to a load equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimatetransverse load, and held for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until theload reaches the value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse load andthereafter increased by 5% of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure.Each time the load is applied, it shall be held for 2 minutes. The ultimate transverseload shall not be less than the design ultimate transverse load.
5.2 Measurement of Cover
The cover shall be measured at 3 points, one within 1.8m from the butt end of thepole, second within 0.6m from the top and the third at the intermediate point. Themean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than +/-1mm from thespecified value, and the individual value should not differ by more than+/-3mm fromthe specified value.
5.3 The number of poles selected for testing and their conformity criteria shall be asfollows:________________________________________________________________Lot Sample Permissible No. of PolesSize Size No. of Defective for Transverse
Samples Strength TestUp to 100 10 1 2101 to 200 15 1 3201 to 300 20 2 4301 to 500 30 3 5
___________________________________________________________________
5.4 All the poles selected in 5.3 shall be tested for overall length, cross-section anduprightness. The tolerance shall be +/-15mm on overall length, +/-3mm on cross-sectional dimensions, and 0.5% on uprightness.
5.5 The number of poles which do not satisfy the requirements of overall strength,cross section and uprightness shall not exceed the number given in 5.3. If thenumber of such poles exceeds the corresponding number, all poles in the lot shallbe tested for requirements, and those not satisfying the requirements shall berejected.
5.6 All the poles tested for transverse strength test shall satisfy the requirements of thetest. If one or more poles fail, twice the number of poles originally tested shall be
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-11
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
selected from those already selected and subjected to test. If there is no failureamong these poles, the lot shall be considered to have satisfied the requirements ofthe test.
6. Marking
The poles shall be cleanly and indelibly marked with the following:
a) Month and year of manufacture, at approximately 3m from the butt end;b) Specified working load in kg, at approximately 3m from the butt end; andc) The design lifting point.
7. Bid Documentation7.1 The Bidder shall furnish following documents together with Bid;
a. Two (2) clear copies of the standards, governing fabrication and testing ofprestressed concrete poles and two (2) clear copies of other standardsindicated in the specifications.
b. Two (2) clear copies of detailed design and drawings of each type of pole.c. Two (2) clear certified copies of all tests performed on similar poles of
same sizes and similar working loads.d. A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance
and deviations, if any.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide the following details:a) Pole dimensions in cross-section and pole taper;b) Location and size of pre-stressing strands;c) Hole locations;d) Design ground line;e) Marking of the lifting point;f) Minimum ultimate transverse load;g) Transverse load at first crackh) Concrete design mix and cement specificationi) Specifications of the pre-stressing strands, their tensile strength and sizes
Table: 2
Pole AttributesOverall Length 11m 8mPoint of Application of Loadfrom Pole Top 0.6m 0.125m
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-12
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Minimum Depth of Planting 1.8m 1.5m( shall be based on site condition)
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-13
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 3.0 AAAC CONDUCTOR
1. Scope
This Specification covers the general requirements of design, manufacture andtesting of XLPE covered all aluminum alloy conductor for 11kV overheaddistribution system.
2. Description
2.1 The manufacturer of the covered conductor must have been accredited withISO 9001 quality certification (including design in the scope of registration).
2.2 The conductor shall be of multi-strand round compacted hard drawn aluminumalloy conforming to AS 3675 latest revision thereof or any recognized internationalstandards that ensures at least a substantially equal quality to the standardmentioned above. The Conductor wires shall not have any joints except for thosemade on the base wire.
2.3 The covering insulating material shall be of track resistant UV stabilized (weatherresistant). The average thickness of the covering insulation shall not be less than thatstipulated in the Technical Requirements. The hardness of the covering XLPE shallbe such that it should not get damaged by the kite string and shall be suitable forfixing insulation piercing Arc Protectors. The covering shall be fully pressureextruded and dry cured so as to provide a uniform thickness throughout the length ofthe conductor.
2.4 Suitable water blocking material shall be incorporated between the conductor andthe covering during the extrusion process to prevent the migration of water along theconductor. The water blocking material shall be of contrasting colour to that of theconductor. The water blocking material shall not affect the inter-strand conductionand also not affect the adhesion between the conductor and the XLPE cover. Waterblocking material shall be stable at maximum operating temperature of 80oC and fulltechnical particulars with regard to the above shall be furnished with the offer.
2.5 The following types of covered conductors shall be supplied:
(I) A) Nominal conductor area mm2- 100
i) Number of strands Nos. - 7ii) Diameter of the wire mm - 4.26iii) Nominal conductor diameter mm – 12.78
iv) Max. linear resistance at 200C Ohms/km - 0.3390
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-14
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
B) Covering Insulationi) Minimum average thickness of XLPE covering mm - 2.0ii) Minimum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 1.7iii) Maximum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 2.5
C) Covered Conductor
i) Minimum breaking strength of conductor (KN) – 29.26ii) Short time current rating/1sec. (kA) – 11.0iii) Conductor Operating Temperatures (Max.)
1) Continuous operation0C - 80
2) Emergency operation0C - 100
3) Short circuit operation (5 sec)0C - 210
iv) Covered conductor overall diameter range mm - 16.0 to 19.3
(II) A) Nominal conductor area mm2- 55
i) Number of strands Nos. - 7ii) Diameter of the wire mm – 3.15iii) Nominal conductor diameter mm – 9.45
iv) Max. linear resistance at 200C Ohms/km - 0.6210
B) Covering Insulationi) Minimum average thickness of XLPE covering mm - 2.0ii) Minimum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 1.7iii) Maximum thickness of XLPE covering at any point - 2.5
C) Covered Conductor
i) Minimum breaking strength of conductor (KN) – 16.03ii) Short time current rating/1sec. (kA) – 11.0iii) Conductor Operating Temperatures (Max.)
1) Continuous operation0C - 80
2) Emergency operation0C - 100
3) Short circuit operation (5 sec)0C - 210
iv) Covered conductor overall diameter range mm – 12.67 to 16.0
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-15
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3. Packaging
3.1 The finished covered conductors shall be delivered in continuous lengths of 500 ± 5meters and the ends of the covered conductors shall be effectively sealed with heatshrinkable cap to prevent ingress of moisture. The conductor shall be wound to thedrum with the lowest number at the inner end of the drum. They shall be supplied inwooden drums made of well-seasoned wood that is treated to prevent deteriorationby termites or fungus attack and suitable for outdoor storage of twelve (12) monthsor steel drums. The chemical used for treating the wood shall not be harmful to theconductor and the drum shall be lined with an impervious material to prevent directcontact of the covered conductor with the drum.
The external flange diameter shall be such that the distance between the outer edgeof the flange and the packed conductor shall not be less than 75mm so that the drumcould be rolled on the flanges without causing damage to the conductor. Direction ofrolling shall be clearly marked.
The drum shall have spindle hole of adequate diameter and reinforced with steelplates for mounting the drum on horizontal axle for laying out the conductor.
3.2 Each reel of the conductors furnished shall contain only one (1) length of conductor.
3.3 All reels shall be legibly marked in paint with the following information:
a) Size of conductorb) Type of conductorc) Length in metersd) Net weight of conductore) Direction of rolling
3.4 The standard length of the completed cover conductor in each reel shall be asper the table below:
Conductor Size (sq. mm): 100 55Normal Length of the Conductor (m): 500 1000
4. Tests
4.1 Routine Tests
The manufactured conductor shall be tested in full compliance with the governingstandard including following routine tests:
Test on wire before stranding
i) Wire diameterii) Ultimate tensile strength
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-16
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
iii) Wrapping testiv) Resistivity test
Test on finished covered conductor
i) Inter-strand conductivity testii) Thickness of coveringiii) Static water blocking testiv) Stripping testv) Spark test
4.2 Type Tests
The Bidder shall submit the type test reports along with the Bid. The CoveredConductors shall be type tested conforming to AS 3675 of 1993, or IEC Standardor the governing standard, and certified copies of the type test certificates shall befurnished with the offer The report shall be issued by a recognized independenttesting authority. The employer also reserves the right to have tests carried out at hisown cost by and independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding thequality of supply. The cable shall be subjected to the following type tests:
a) Tests on wire before strandingb) Tests on covering materialc) Tests on finished covered conductor
The Type Test Certificates furnished shall be from a recognized independenttesting authority acceptable to the purchaser.
5. Bid Documentation
5.1 The Bidder shall provided with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of the covered conductor and two (2) clearcopies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of all types of covered conductoras required by governing standards.
5.3 The Bidder shall also furnish the Certificate of Compliance at the time of theshipment of each lot of conductor, or as required by the appropriate section of theequivalent international standard.
5.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
5.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-17
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 4.0 SELF SUPPORTING LV AERIAL BUNDLEDCONDUCTORS (ABC) CABLE
1. SCOPE
This Specification covers the design, manufacture, factory test, supply anddelivery of 0.6/1 kV four-core cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated selfsupporting aerial bundled conductors (ABC) for use in the construction of230/400V, 3-phase, 4-wire, unigrounded, distribution network.
2. DESCRIPTION
2.1 The cable shall be suitable for use within Nepal: altitude range 0-2000 meters,typical temperature range -5 deg C to 45 deg. C, relative humidity 80-90%.
2.2 The conductor shall consist of compact round stranded aluminum wires. Theyshall be of H2 or H4 grade (complying with IEC: 60228) and per the following:
a) Upto and including 50 sq. mm. conductors = H2 grade.b) All sizes above 50 sq. mm. conductors = H4 grade.
2.3 The conductor shall be insulated by extruded black cross-linked polyethylene(XLPE) material. The cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulating shall be blackin colour and to be stabilized against deterioration caused by exposure to directsunlight and ultraviolet radiation conforming to requirement specified IEC 60502.XLPE insulation shall be pressure extruded. The nominal value of the carbonblack content of the sheath (insulation) shall be 2.5 with a tolerance of + 0.5%(Table 20 of IEC : 60502-1, 2004). The XLPE material shall be of Borealis,Austria/ BASF, Germany/Du Pont, USA/Sumito Chemicals, Japan or DOWChemicals, USA make. In case of other make, the bidder shall submit thecertification from Independent Internationally Recognized Agency/ies tosubstantiate the equivalency to the above referred make. Failure to furnish theequivalency certification will result in the offer being rejected.
2.4 The complete cable shall consist of four equal-size insulated conductors strandedtogether, and the direction of lay shall be right-hand. The type of constructionshall cause the tensile load to be shared equally between four conductors. The coreidentification and the assembly (laying up) of cores be as per IEC 60502. Ridgesshall be provided over phase core and neutral core also.
2.5 The other technical specifications of the ABC are given in Table 1: TechnicalData.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-18
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3. STANDARDS
3.1 The cable shall comply with the latest revision of UK ESI Standard 43-14:"AerialBundled Conductors XLPE Insulated for LV Overhead Distribution", orcomparable internationally recognized standards with will result in the cable ofequal or better quality.
4. PHASE IDENTIFICATION
4.1 The identification of the conductors shall be provided by means of ribbing on theexternal surface of the insulation. The neutral conductor shall preferably bemarked with a minimum of 12 for 25mm2, 16 for 50 mm2 and 20 for 95 mm2 ribsspaced evenly around the circumference of the core.
5. EMBOSSING ON CORES
5.1 All the cable shall have the following embossing on insulated neutral conductor foridentification in interval not more than 2 meters. Font size of letters to be min. 5mm.
a) Name or trade mark of manufacturerb) Voltage gradec) Type of cable, i.e LV ABCd) LV Aerial Bunch Cable (4C X 25, 4C X 50, 4C X 95 Sq mm)e) Size of phase conductor, i.e. 4C X 25, 4C X 50, 4C X 95 Sq mmf) Year and month of manufacturing.g) Type of insulation, i.e XLPEh) Name of purchaseri) Contract Number
6. SIZE AND QUANTITY
6.1 Sizes of cable shall be:
4x95 mm24x50 mm24x25 mm2
6.2 The required quantity of the ABC of above sizes shall be as shown in the PriceSchedule(s).
7 TESTING
7.1 Type Test
All the type tests are detailed below in accordance with referenced ESI, IEC60502, IEC 60540 or equivalent standards, amended upto date, shall be performedon cable samples drawn by the purchaser:
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-19
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Construction tests
-Verification of diameters of conductor and insulated conductor, and thickness ofinsulation, and so on.
Test on XLPE
-Hot set tests-Tensile strength at break-Elongation at break-Shrinkage
Mechanical tests
-Breaking load test-Bending test
Electrical tests
-High voltage test-Conductor resistance at 20 deg C.-Insulation resistance
Type tests are required to be carried out on a sample of any one size of cablemanufactured. Sample for the type test will be drawn by the purchaser’srepresentative and the type tests will be witnessed by him. The type tests shall becarried out by the supplier at an any of the following independent recognizedlaboratory at the cost of supplier:
a. ASTA Certification Services (UK) or National MetorologicalLaboratory in UK, accredited to Western European Legal MetrologyCorporation.
b. CESI (Centro Electtrotecnico Sperimentale Italiano S.P.A) or NationalMetrological Laboratory in Italy, accredited to Western European LegalMetrology Corporation.
c. ESEF (Ensemble Des Stations D' Essais a' Grande Puissance Francaises)or National Metrological Laboratory in France, accredited to WesternEuropean Legal Metrology Corporation.
d. B.V. KEMA (KEMA) or National Metrological Laboratory inNetherlands, accredited to Western European Legal MetrologyCorporation.
e. National Metrological Laboratory in Japan, accredited to NationalLaboratory Accreditation System in Japan.
f. National Metrological Laboratory, accredited to American Associationfor Laboratory Accreditation.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-20
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
g. The type test from other internationally recognised independent testlaboratory, such as PTB, Germany; IHP, Turkey; PTP, Austria; NMI,Holland; Falcon Test Lab, UK, Ofgem (formerly known as 'Offer"),Ireland may also be acceptable.
7.2 Acceptance Test
The following tests shall be made on the completed cable at the manufacturer'splant in accordance with referenced ESI, IEC 60502, IEC 60540 or equivalentstandards during pre-dispatch inspection and testing:
Construction tests
-Verification of diameters of conductor and insulated conductor, and thickness ofinsulation, and so on.
Test on XLPE
-Tensile strength at break-Elongation at break
Mechanical tests
-Breaking load test-Bending test
Electrical tests
-High voltage test-Conductor resistance at 20 deg C.-Insulation resistance
8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The manufacture shall posses ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Certification for themanufacture of LV ABC Cable for the plant where the manufacture of LVABC Cable is done. The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISO certificatecertified as true copy of the original by the manufacture, along with the offer.
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, whichshall include, among others, information to meet the following requirement,failing which the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-21
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements ofISO9001:2000;
vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for theraw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
9. PACKAGING
9.1 The ABC Cable shall be wound on non-returnable wooden drums conforming toIS: 10418 with latest amendments thereof. All timber shall be treated to provideprotection against rot and insects; the treatment process not having deleteriouseffect on the cable. The drums should have supporting plate with bush at centralhole. The end of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealingmaterial. The drums shall be of such construction as to assure delivery of cable inthe field free from displacement and damage and should be able to withstand allstresses due to handling and the stringing operation so that cable surface is notdented, scratched or damaged in any way during transportation and erection. Thecable shall be properly lagged on the drums.
9.2 Each reel of the conductors furnished shall contain only one (1) length ofconductor.
9.3 Maximum size and weight of drum (excluding lagging) shall be:
Diameter 1600 mmWidth 1000 mmWeight 1.5 MT (including cable)
9.4 All reels shall be legibly marked in paint with the following information:
a) Size of conductorb) Type of conductorc) Length in metersd) Net weight of conductore) Direction of rolling
10. BID DOCUMENTATION
10.1 The BIDDER shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the Standardgoverning fabrication of the conductor and two (2) clear copies of all other
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-22
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
specifications referenced therein as relevant to the fabrication and testing LVABC.
10.2 Drawings: 2 sets showing general construction, size and weight.
10.3 The BIDDER shall provide the name and the address of the manufacturers of thecable being offered and the length of the cable in the manufacturer's standardreels, including net and gross weights.
10.4 Complete type test report for all sizes of ABC Cable.
10.5 All data supplied shall be bound separately from the Bid Document.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-23
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
TABLE 1
TECHNICAL DATA
SELF SUPPORTING LV ABC
Nominal cross sectional area, mm2 25 50 95Number of Core 4 4 4Form of conductor Stranded compacted circularNumber of wires in conductor 7 7 19Min. diameter of conductor, mm 5.8 8.0 11.3Max. dc resistance of conductor at 20 deg. C, Ohm/km 1.200 0.641 0.320Min. breaking load of conductor, kN 3.5 7.0 13.3Min. average thickness of insulation excluding ribs, mm 1.3 1.5 1.7Min. thickness of insulation at any point, mm 1.07 1.25 1.43Min. breaking load of cable, kN 14.0 28.0 53.2
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-24
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
SP 4.1 FITTINGS FOR SELF-SUPPORTING LV AERIAL BUNDLEDCONDUCTORS (ABC)
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of fittings and associatedapparatus for with LV aerial bundled conductors (ABC).
2. Service Condition:
Ambient temperature : -5o
C to 55o
CAltitude : up to 2000 m above MSLHumidity : 99% (max.)Mains voltage : 400/230 VSystem frequency : 50 Hz
3. Description
3.1 The fittings, hardware and equipment shall be fabricated in accordance with UKESI Standard 43-14: "Conductor Fittings and Associated Apparatus for use withLV ABC" latest revision, and all referenced standards therein, or latest revisionthereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least asubstantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above, will also beacceptable.
3.2 The ABC Cable hardware manufacturing company must have been accredited withISO 9001:2000 (including design in scope of registration) quality certification.
3.3 The fittings shall be for use in conjunction with 4-core ABC of 95 sq. mm, 50 sq.mm and 25 sqmm nominal cross-sectional areas.
3.4 Contractor shall get approval of all drawings and hardware sample from Purchaserbefore starting the fabrication of all hardware.
3.5 The fittings and accessories are as follows:
3.5.1 Anchor clamps:
The anchor clamps shall be bolted type. The wedge of clamp shall be made of ageand weather resistant insulating material with high mechanical strength. Thetightening straps shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. The clamp shall beloaded with the spring. The clamp shall have at least 2 bolts for tightening. Thehooking end of the clamp shall be provided with hot dip galvanized nut and botswith safety lock. The Anchor clamps shall be suitable for use in conjunction withthe support hooks stated in Sub Clauses 3.5.3.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-25
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The clamp shall be suitable for following ABC.
ABC size/type Min. Breaking load (kN)
95 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 4350 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 3725 sq.mm, 4-core ABC 37
3.5.2 Suspension clamps
The suspension clamps shall be suitable for the installation and suspension offollowing ABC cables types and angle of deviations. The clamps shall be suitablefor use in conjunction with the support hooks stated in Sub Clauses 3.5.3 below.
Type ABC size/type Max. angle of deviations (degree)Type A1 95 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 30Type A2 50 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 30Type A3 25 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 30Type B1 95 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 60Type B2 50 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 60Type B3 25 sq. mm, 4-core ABC 60
The ferrous part of the clamps shall be hot dip galvanized.
3.5.3 Support hooks (Pig tail type)
The support hooks shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel of sufficient sizes. Thesupport hook shall be suitable for mounting in steel tubular (ST) poles.
(i) Support hooks suitable for PSC poles: The support hooks shall be bolted typeand shall be of sufficient length and have sufficient threading to enablethem to be used on following sizes of PSC poles.
a) Type A: Size ranging between 130 mm. to 170 mm.b) Type B: Size ranging between 190 mm. to 240 mm.
The pig tail end of the hook shall have stopper for maintaining clearancebetween pole and the suspension clamp. The hook shall be provided witheither 2 sets of suitable hexagonal nuts or one set of hexagonal nut and oneset of eye nut. The eye of eye nut shall have minimum inner diameter of 30mm. and shall be suitable for installing in conjunction with anchor clampstated in clause 3.5.1 above and stay tightener. The support hook shall havediameter not less than 16 mm. and shall have enough mechanical strength towithstand load, which applies during its service period. The support hookand its accessories shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. Theconceptual drawing of support hook is given in CSLV 12.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-26
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
(ii) Support hooks suitable for Steel Tubular Poles: The support hooks shall bemounted on circular two-way clamp. The hook (pig tail) shall be mounted onone of the ways of the clamp. The conceptual drawing of the hook (pig tail)is given in CSLV 12. The clamp shall be suitable for following sizes ofpoles.
a) Type TC6: Two-way clamp suitable for pole diameter ranging between190 mm. to 230 mm.
b) Type TC8: Two-way clamp suitable for pole diameter ranging between140 mm. to 180 mm.
The remaining way of clamps shall be suitable for accommodating twonumbers of double eye fitting stated in Sub Clause 2.4.5 herein, to be usedalong with anchor clamps stated in clause 2.4.1 above. The width andthickness of clamp shall be not less than 50 mm. and 6 mm. respectively.Nuts and bolts of the clamp shall have diameter not less than 16 mm. Theconceptual drawing of semi circular clamp for Telecopic pole is give inCSLV 10
3.5.4 Weak links
The weak link shall be suitable for installation between support hook and thesuspension or anchor clamp. The link shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. Twoends of the link shall be twisted by 90o. The weak link shall be suitable for using inconjunction with following ABC.
(i) 95 sq. mm., 4-core ABC(ii) 50 sq. mm., 4-core ABC(iii) 25 sq. mm., 4-core ABC
The weak links designated above shall have release force near to the highest valuesof maximum working tension of respective ABCs.
3.5.5 Double-eye fitting
The double eye fitting shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. The diameter ofthe steel and inner diameter of the eye shall be not less than 16 mm. and 30 mm.respectively. The one end of the eye fitting shall be mounted on bolt of clampsstated in sub clause 3.5.3 (ii), stated above and other end shall be used along withanchor clamp, stated in sub clause 3.5.1. The conceptual drawing of the fitting isgiven in CSLV 11.
3.5.6 Insulated wall fittings (cleats)
The insulated wall fittings shall be single hole fixing type. The fixing shall be doneeither by the hammering of nail or by using lag screw into hole on wall. The fittingshall be made of weather, heat and age resistant black polyamide insulating
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-27
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
material with sufficient mechanical strength. It shall have capacity to hold differentsizes of ABC as stated above and other cables having overall outer diameter from 6mm. to 50 mm. Preferably, the fitting shall be removable notched strap type. Thefitting shall have wet flashover voltage not less than 6 kV.
3.5.7 Insulate removable strap
The insulated removable strap shall be made of weather, heat and age resistantinsulating material having wet flashover voltage not less than 6 kV. It shall besuitable to hold ABC having overall outer diameter from 20 mm. to 50 mm.Preferably, the fitting shall be removable notched strap type.
3.5.8 Insulated cable end caps
The insulated cable end caps shall be made of weather and age resistant insulatingmaterial and shall have wet flashover voltage not less than 6 kV. The cap shall beheat shrinkable type and shall be coated internally with a suitable sealant. The capsshall be suitable for following sizes of ABC.
(i) 95 sq. mm., 4-core ABC(ii) 50 sq. mm., 4-core ABC(iii) 25 sq. mm., 4-core ABC
3.5.9 Insulated insulation piercing connectors
The insulated insulation piercing connectors shall be suitable for using withaluminum ABC and concentric cables. It shall be made of high quality, weather,heat and age resistant insulating material having wet flashover voltage not less than6 kV. It shall be watertight and suitable for making connections to the live lines.The piercing of main line and the tapping shall be done simultaneously. The designof the connectors shall be such that its removal is possible even after breaking ofthe shear head. The connector shall be provided with end cap for tapping end. Theconnector shall be suitable for following cables.
Type Main TappingType A 25-95 sq. mm, ABC 25-95 sq. mm, ABCType B 25-95 sq. mm, ABC 6-25 sq. mm, Concentric Cable
3.5.10 Pre-insulated junction sleeves for Aerial Bundled Cable (ABC)
Pre-insulated Aluminum junction sleeves shall be used for connecting two separatepiece of Aluminum Aerial Bundled Cable (ABC), through joint by crimping withhexagonal compression tool. The pre-insulated aluminum junction sleeves for threephases and neutral shall have grease for contact. The insulation of the sheath ofsleeve shall have resistant to compression with water tightness joints and the wetflashover voltage of the insulating material shall not be less than 6 kV. The end ofsleeve shall have colored joint to identify the section of the conductor to be used.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-28
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The following color code shall be used.
ABC Size (mm2
) Colour Code
95 sq. mm Grey50 sq. mm Yellow25 sq.mm Blue
The sleeve shall be marked with the following information with an indelible ink:
The length of ABC to be stripped.Number of compression to be made.Section of conductor, die to be used.
3.5.11 Insulated tools for with insulated insulation piercing connectors.
The tool set shall be fully insulated, made of high quality insulating materials,having wet flashover voltage not less than 6 kV. The design of the tool set shall besuitable for use with connectors described in sub clause 3.5.10 above and shallallow the safe installation to live line.
3.5.12 Core separators (pairs)
The core separators shall essentially comprise two wedges to facilitate theinstallation of connectors on tensioned ABC cable. The two separators shall bejoined together with a nylon cord. The two separators, which shall be made fromwither hardwood or rigid plastic, shall be so shaped as to be capable of beingpositively locked in position.
3.5.13 Anchor clamp for concentric type service drop cable
The anchor clamp for concentric type service cable shall be of wedge type. Thewedge of clamp shall be made of age and weather resistant insulating material withhigh mechanical strength. The tightening strap shall be made of hot dip galvanizedsteel. The clamp shall be suitable for the concentric cable of 6 sq. mm. The clampshall be suitable for use in conjunction with support hooks and wall brackets forservice connection stated in sub clauses 3.5.3 and 3.5.14 respectively.
3.5.14 Wall bracket for Service connection
The wall bracket for service connection shall be suitable for use in conjunctionwith anchor clamp for concentric type service drop cable stated in sub clause3.5.13. It shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. The fixing shall be done eitherby the hammering of nail or by using screw into hole on wall. Suitable number offixing nail or the screw as appropriate shall be the part of wall bracket for serviceconnection.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-29
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
4. Tests4.1 In respect of the following fittings the tests shall include, but not limited to the
following:
Anchor clamps:Static testDynamic testHigh temperature test (thermal)Low temperature testTensile (high tension) testVoltage test (on ABC) following dynamic, high and low temperature and hightension tests.Suspension clamps:Slip testVoltage test (on cable)Thermal testInsulation piercing connectors:Electrical heat cycle test
Tests for other fittings and hardware shall be conducted in accordance with therelevant national or international standards.
5. Bid Documentation
5.1 The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the Standardgoverning fabrication and testing of the fittings and accessories for LV ABC andtwo (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
5.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) sets of complete description, catalogue,dimensional drawings showing general construction and size of all fittings andaccessories.
5.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests performedon all fittings and accessories offered.
5.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
5.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-30
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
SP 5.0 SILICON STEEL CORE TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. ScopeThese specifications cover the requirements of oil-immersed, naturally cooled singleand three-phase distribution transformers suitable for outdoors installation on 11kV and33 kV, 50 Hz distribution systems.
2. Service ConditionThe transformers shall be designed and constructed for outdoor installation andoperation under the following conditions:Ambient temperature: -5oC to 45oCRelative humidity: up to 95%Altitude: up to 2000 m above the mean sea level
3. Standards and Quality Certification3.1 The equipment specified in this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest
edition of the appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognised internationalstandards equivalent to IEC Standards. In particular:
IEC 60076 Power transformersIEC 60137 Insulating Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 60156 Insulating liquids-Determination of the breakdown voltage at powerfrequency-test method
IEC 60296 Specification for uninhibited mineral insulating oils for transformersand switchgear
IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levelsIEC 60616 Terminal and tapping materials for power transformerIEC 60722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power
transformers and reactorsIEC 60733 Determination of water in insulating oils.IEC 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion.
3.2 The manufacturer of the offered transformers must have been accredited with valid ISO9000 quality certification with design in its scope of registration.
4. Description
4.1 Technical details are given in Table 1 to Table 3. The quantity of the transformers to besupplied shall be as given in the Schedules of Rates and Prices.
4.2 Tank
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-31
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The tank shall be of welded construction and fabricated from mild steel of adequatethickness. All seams shall be properly welded to withstand requisite impact duringshort circuit without distortion. All welding shall be stress relieved. The tank covershall be bolted on to the tank with weatherproof, hot-oil resistant, resilient gasket inbetween for complete oil tightness. Pressed-steel radiators shall be mounted ontransformer-tanks of 100 kVA and higher rating transformers. The radiator shall be ofpressed-steel of corrugated type design. Heat dissipation calculation in respect of thenumber, size and length of the radiators are to be satisfied by design calculation.Each transformer shall be provided with a case of rigid construction, which shall beoil-tight and gas-tight. The thickness of all tank sides except the tank-bottom andcover shall not be less than 3.2 mm. The thickness of tank-bottom and cover shallnot be less than 4.0 mm. The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakageor permanent deformation, a pressure 25% greater than the maximum operatingpressure. The tank cover shall be bolted on to the main-tank. Each transformer shallbe provided with earthing terminal with clamp type connector.
4.3 PaintingAll sheet steel works shall be phosphated in accordance with the following procedureand in accordance with BS 2569 and BS 5493.The tank body shall be sand/shot blasted to remove the welding scales. Oil, grease, dirtshall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed bypickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightlyalkaline hot water and drying. After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried outwith clean water, followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and evendrying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed by the application of two coats of stovingtype zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while the second coatshall be stoved. After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamelpaint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. Touch up shall be applied aftercompletion of tests. The color for the finishing paint shall be light gray or as approvedby Employer. The final finished thickness of paint film on steel shall not be less than 60microns. Finished painted surface shall present aesthetically pleasing appearance freefrom runs and drips. A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minortouching up required at site.
4.4 CoreThe transformer shall be of core type. The cores shall be constructed with primecore-material of interleaved grade non-aging, low loss, high permeability, grainoriented and cold rolled silicon steel laminations, properly treated after being shearedto remove any burrs and shall be re-annealed to remove any residual stresses. Thesteel shall be thin in lamination.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-32
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The yoke laminations shall be in single piece instead of pieces to reduce chances ofintroducing more air gaps in the core construction.All steel sections used for the support of the core shall be thoroughly sand blastedafter cutting, drilling and welding.
All laminations shall be properly insulated with the materials that will not deterioratedue to pressure and hot oil.
The core shall be rigidly clamped with positive locking device to ensure adequatemechanical strength. Core and coil assembly shall be capable of withstanding thevibrations and shock during transportation, installation, service and adequateprovision shall be made to prevent movement of core and coil assembly relative tothe tank during these conditions.
The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting complete core andcoil assembly of transformer.Permissible Flux Density and Over FluxingFlux density at rated voltage and frequency shall not exceed 1.6 T. The no-loadcurrent at rated voltage and at 112.5% voltage shall not exceed the values givenbelow with tolerance as indicated.At 100% rated voltage 2% of rated full load current + 30% as tolerance.At 112.5% rated voltage max 4% of rated full load current
The bidder shall submit the design calculation in support of flux density and no-loadcurrent at 100% and 112.5% voltage along with drawings of core-steps, limb-diameter, window-height, limb-center, etc.
4.5 WindingThe design, construction and treatment of winding shall give proper consideration toall service factors. The winding shall be so designed that all coil assemblies are ofidentical voltage ratio and shall be interchangeable. All delta leads should beclamped tightly on to the special frame/bracket making pie (π) frame. The leadsleading to the bushing terminals should be clamped to the horizontal support base ofthe pie frame so that vibration during short circuit is not passed on to the windings.The completed assembly of core and coils shall be dried in a vacuum sufficient toensure elimination of air and moisture within the insulating structure. After thedrying process, the assembly shall be immediately impregnated with dry oil todevelop full electrical strength in the windings. The windings of the transformershall be fabricated from copper materials for 50 KVA and higher rating transformer,whereas it may be of copper or aluminum for lower rating transformers.Current Density
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-33
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Current density for any part of the winding shall not exceed the following values:
Copper winding transformers ≤ 2.8 amp/mm2
Aluminum winding transformers ≤ 1.5 amp/mm2
4.6 Oil Preservation SystemThe transformers up to 25 kVA of voltage rating 11/0.4 kV and 11/0.23 kV shall becompletely oil filled type. The transformers of higher ratings shall be provided withconservator. The conservator vessel shall have a capacity between highest and thelowest levels of not less than 7.5% of the total cold oil volume of the transformer.Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a sufficient-size breather in which silica-gel shall be used as the drying agent. Windows in the silica-gel breathers shall besufficiently large enough to allow crystal color change to be easily observed from adistance of 6 m. The position of the silica gel breather shall be such that maintenancecan be carried out without the need to de-energize the transformer.
4.7 Tap ChangerAn externally - operated tap changer for transformers rated 100 kVA and above shallbe furnished with each transformer, to be operated only when the transformer is de-energized. The tap changer shall include an operating handle, visible indication of tapposition and means for locking the tap changer in any desired position. The lockingdevice shall be arranged to prevent locking the tap changer in an off position.Mechanical means shall be provided for limiting the maximum and minimum travellingof the extreme tap positions to be at the maximum and minimum position of the tapchanger.
4.8 Insulating OilThe insulating oil shall be refined mineral oil. Necessary quantity of oil for thetransformer shall be furnished by the contractor.
4.9 Bushings
The bushings shall be made of homogeneous and well vitrified porcelain. The colorof the insulator shall be brown and the surface shall have polished glaze.
The high voltage bushings shall have clamp-type terminal lugs suitable forterminating 30-120 mm2 stranded conductor.
The low voltage bushings shall have clamp-type terminal lugs suitable forterminating aluminum conductor compatible to the kVA rating (with 100% factor ofsafety) of the transformer.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-34
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The low voltage neutral bushings shall include a clamp-type terminal lug forterminating together an earth-wire and an aluminium conductor of neutral circuit ofthe LV system.
4.10 Temperature riseMaximum oil-temperature rise and maximum winding-temperature rise aboveambient-temperature of 45oC when carrying maximum continuous rated current shallnot exceed the following;a. In oil by thermometer 50oCb. In winding by resistance 55oC
The temperature rise of the insulating oil shall be measured near the top of the maintank.
4.11 GasketsAll sealing washers / Gaskets shall be made of oil and heat resistance nitrile /neoprene/ synthetic rubber bonded with cork gasket. Gasket made with naturalrubber and cork shall not be acceptable. The thickness of the tank cover gasket shallnot be less than 6 mm before compression.
4.12 ClearancesMinimum electrical clearances between the phases and phase to earth shall not beless than the values given below:Voltage Medium Phase to phase, mm Phase to earth, mm
33 kV Air 330 32011 kV Air 255 205400 V Air 75 55
The clearances shall be maintained by fixing the bimetallic connectors in position.
4.13 Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided with each transformer. Lower oil filter and drain valve Liquid level gauge Lifting Lug Name plate Tank grounding terminal connector suitable for grounding cable Pressure relief device of explosion-vent type for 25 kVA and higher ratings
4.14 Rating and Terminal Marking Plate
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-35
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Each transformer shall be provided with a non detachable rating and terminal markingplate of weather proof material, preferably of brass fitted in a visible positionmentioning the following information:
- Guaranteed No Load Loss and Load loss- Details of rating (rated output, voltage, phases, frequency etc.)- Cooling- Connection and vector diagram- Weights (Total, weight of core, weight of winding and weight of oil)- Name of manufacturer and year of manufacture- Standards of manufacture- Physical dimension of the transformer- Any other relevant information
The face of the transformer body shall display the words “Property of Nepal ElectricityAuthority" on two sides written in indelible paint.
5. TestsTests shall be performed in accordance with these specifications in line with relevant IECstandards.
5.1 Type TestsThe Bidder shall submit, along with the Bid, type test reports (detail) on the followingtests performed on identical units.- Temperature rise tests- Dielectric Type test
i) Impulse voltage testsii) Separate source AC withstand voltage test
If the type test report for identical unit of transformer is not available from the testinglaboratory/ies below, the type test report of similar type transformer may be consideredacceptable during bid evaluation, provided, the bidder shall upon award of the Contractand prior to mass production of transformer, undertake to carry out type test onidentical unit of each capacity of transformer in one of the following testing laboratoriesin the presence of representative appointed by Nepal Electricity Authority at no extracost to the Client/Employer: a. ASTA Certification Services (UK) or NationalMetorological Laboratory in UK, accredited to Western European Legal MetrologyCorporation b. CESI (Centro Electtrotecnico Sperimentale Italiano S.P.A) or NationalMetrological Laboratory in Italy, accredited to Western European Legal MetrologyCorporation, c. ESEF (Ensemble Des Stations D' Essais a' Grande PuissanceFrancaises) or National Metrological Laboratory in France, accredited to WesternEuropean Legal Metrology Corporation,d. B.V. KEMA (KEMA) or NationalMetrological Laboratory in Netherlands, accredited to Western European Legal
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-36
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Metrology Corporation,e. National Metrological Laboratory in Japan, accredited toNational Laboratory Accreditation System in Japan, f. National MetrologicalLaboratory, accredited to American Association for Laboratory Accreditation, g. Thetype test from other internationally recognised independent meter test laboratory, suchas PTB, Germany; PTP, Austria; NMI, Holland; Falcon Test Lab, UK and Ofgem(formerly known as 'Offer"), Ireland may also be acceptable. In this case, for purposeof evaluation, the values of no-load and load losses shall be considered from the valuesguaranteed by the bidder.
5.2 Routine TestsThe following tests shall be performed on each unit of transformer by the manufacturerbefore dispatch and submit the test-reports to the Employer.- Applied voltage test- Induced voltage test- No load loss and excitation current test- Impedance voltage and load loss tests- Winding resistance measurement- Ratio tests- Polarity and phase relation tests- Tank leakage tests- Insulation resistance tests- Separate source power frequency voltage withstand test- Dielectric breakdown strength of oil
The bidders are required to furnish the details of testing facilities available at themanufacturer’s premises for conducting the tests listed above in 5.2
5.3 Tests to be witnessed by the Employer
To ensure about the quality of transformers, the inspection shall be carried out infollowing three stages:
(i) In the first stage, after award of the contract and prior to mass production, themanufacturer shall design & manufacture the prototype of DistributionTransformers and carry out type test on identical unit of each capacity oftransformer in one of the following testing laboratories in the presence ofrepresentative appointed by Nepal Electricity Authority at no extra cost to theClient/Employer: a. ASTA Certification Services (UK) or NationalMetorological Laboratory in UK, accredited to Western European LegalMetrology Corporation b. CESI (Centro Electtrotecnico Sperimentale ItalianoS.P.A) or National Metrological Laboratory in Italy, accredited to WesternEuropean Legal Metrology Corporation, c. ESEF (Ensemble Des Stations D'
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-37
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Essais a' Grande Puissance Francaises) or National Metrological Laboratory inFrance, accredited to Western European Legal Metrology Corporation,d. B.V.KEMA (KEMA) or National Metrological Laboratory in Netherlands,accredited to Western European Legal Metrology Corporation,e. NationalMetrological Laboratory in Japan, accredited to National LaboratoryAccreditation System in Japan, f. National Metrological Laboratory, accreditedto American Association for Laboratory Accreditation, g. The type test fromother internationally recognised independent meter test laboratory, such as PTB,Germany; PTP, Austria; NMI, Holland; Falcon Test Lab and UK, Ofgem(formerly known as 'Offer"), Ireland. All the type tests shall be concludedwithin 120 days after the award of Contract. The suppliers shall be allowed tomass production only after satisfactory result of Type Test.
(ii) Second stage Inspection will be done when the raw material is received, and theassembly is in progress in the shop floor. After the main raw-materials i.e. coreand winding materials and tanks are arranged and transformers are taken forproduction on shop floor and 20-25% under each lot of assembly has beencompleted. The supplier shall intimate the NEA, in this regard, so that aninspecting officer for carrying out such inspection could be deputed, as far aspossible within fifteen days from the date of intimation. During the first stageinspection, a few assembled cores shall be dismantled to ensure that the CRGOlaminations of M4 or Superior Grade used are of good quality. During this stageof inspection the Manufacturer shall provide the inspectors documentaryevidence such as purchase order, bill of lading, delivery receipt, factory testcertificate and type test report (from the independent laboratory accredited byInternational Accreditation Corporation (ILAC) or International AccreditationForum (IAF) or other reputed Accreditation Agencies) of the core and windingmaterials to be used specifically for the manufacturing of Transformers underthe subjected contract.
(iii) Pre dispatch inspection will be carried out at finished stage i.e. transformers arefully assembled and are ready for dispatch. As and when the transformers areready for dispatch, an offer intimating about the readiness of transformers, forpre dispatch inspection for carrying out routine tests (specified in Clause 5.2) onminimum 2% quantity of offered lot shall be sent by the supplier along withRoutine Test Certificates as specified in Clause 5.2. In addition to above thePurchaser's representative(s) shall also witness the (a) temperature-rise test, (b)dielectric type-test for each type (and rating) of transformer on at least 2 (two)% of each type (and rating) of transformer to be procured. The sample shall beselected by the Employer's representative(s) from the complete-lot ready fordispatch. The above mentioned tests shall be carried out in the premises of theManufacturer.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-38
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
The Contractor shall carry-out [which the Purchaser's representative(s) shall witness]the following tests in a laboratory owned or nominated by the Employer after deliveryin Nepal.a) Temperature rise test on at least one transformer of each rating.b) No Load Loss and Load Loss test on 100 (hundred) % of transformer
The sample shall be selected by the Employer's representative(s) from the complete-lotof delivered transformers. Cost for such tests shall be quoted in the Price Scheduleand shall be paid by the Supplier.
6. Evaluation
6.1 The transformer no-load and load losses shall not exceed the following prescribedvalues. If the guaranteed no load and load losses exceed the prescribed values below,the offer shall be rejected.
For 11/0.4 /0.23 kVS.N. Rating No Load Loss Load Loss
(Watts) (Watts)
1. 25 kVA, 3-ph 75 4602. 50 kVA, 3-ph 120 7503 100 kVA, 3-ph 220 1210
6.2 Transformers shall be evaluated for the loss values (no-load losses and load losses)during bid evaluation based on the following loss capitalization formula:PE = Pb + KL LL + KNLLNL
Where,PE = Evaluated PricePb = Bid PriceKL = Value of Load LossLL = Guaranteed load losses at rated currentKNL = Value of no load LossLNL = Guaranteed no load losses
The transformer losses shall be capitalized as follows for evaluation purpose:KNL =Value of no-load loss= USD 4,684/ kWKL = Value of load loss= USD 618/ kW
6.3 Penalty for Excessive losses: During testing, if it is found that the actual measuredlosses are more than the values guaranteed by the bidder (provided that they are withinthe limit specified in Clause 6.1 above), a penalty shall be recovered from the bidder at
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-39
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
double the loss capitalization rates arrived at clause 6.2 above. For fraction of a kW,proportionate penalty will be recovered.
6.4 For the purpose of this Specification type tests are defined as tests performed on similartransformers of the same general arrangements, same ratings and same mechanical andelectrical characteristics.
6.5 If at any stage it is established that the type test report submitted by the bidder is notsatisfactory, discrepant or ambiguous, then NEA reserves the right to ask thebidder/supplier to conduct the type test on the rating/s of transformers chosen by theNEA in the presence of their representative at reputed national/international testinglaboratory prior to its mass production and/or dispatch. The costs involved inorganizing and conducting such tests shall be borne by the bidder/supplier.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid, the following documentation:a) One (1) clear copy of the IEC standards governing fabrication and testing of
the transformers.b) Two (2) clear certified copies of type tests carried out for each rating as
required by the governing IEC standard and the specifications.c) Two (2) copies of certified outline drawings for each kVA rating showing
dimensions, arrangements, and locations of all parts.d) A clause-by-clause commentary on the specification, specifying compliance
or deviations, if any.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-40
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P.5.1 RATINGS AND FEATURE FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERTABLE 1
Type Three-phase, 11/0.4 kV
Rated power As specified in the Schedules of Ratesand Prices
Rated voltage - Primary 11kV- Secondary 400/230V
Max system voltage- Primary 12kV- Secondary 440V
Rated Frequency 50Hz
Connection - Primary Delta- Secondary Grd. Wye
Cooling System ONAN
Vector group Dyn 11
Rated impedance voltage 3.5 - 4.5%
BIL for windings and
bushings for primary side 75kV
Withstand voltage, 50 Hz, 60 Sec.- Primary 28kV- Secondary 3kV
No load tap changer +/- 2.5%, +/- 5% on HV side(for 100 kVA and above)
Mounting Platform
Insulation levels (IEC) 76 LI 75 AC 28/AC 3
Insulation temperature class A
(IEC 76)
Maximum allowable noise level at
3 metre hemispherical radius <44 dB
Applicable standard These Specifications and IEC
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-41
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 6.0 SURGE ARRESTER AND DISTRIBUTION CUTOUT
S.P.6.1 SURGE ARRESTERS
1. Scope
This specification covers the general requirements of the design, manufacture,testing, supply and delivery of Surge Arresters of Gapless Metal-Oxide type for11kV and 33kV Distribution System of the NEA.
2. System Parameters
(a) Nominal voltage 11 kV 33 kV
(b) System highest voltage 12 kV 36 kV
(c) System frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
(d) No. of phases 3 3
(e) Neutral earthing Effective Non effective
(f) System fault current 20kA 20 A
3. Service Condition
(a) Annual average ambient temperature 300C
(b) Maximum ambient temperature 470C
(c) Solar radiation 1.6 kW/m2
(d) Maximum relative humidity 99%
(e) Environmental condition Humid tropical climate
(f) Operational altitude Up to 3000 meters above MSL
(g) Isokeraunic (Thunder day) level90 ays
4. Applicable Standards
The equipment and components supplied shall be in accordance with the latesteditions of the standards specified below and amendments thereof and the NEASpecifications specified hereafter.
(a) IEC 60099-4 (1999) Part 4Surge Arresters - Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps fora.c. systems
(b) IEC 60099-5 (2000) Part 5 Surge Arresters - Selection and application recommendations
(c) IEC 61109 (1992)Composite insulator for a.c. over headlines with a nominalvoltage greater than 1000V - Definitions, test methods andacceptance criteria.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-42
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
(d) IEC 60507 (1991)Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be usedon a.c. Systems.
5. Technical Parameters
(a) MINIMUM TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Nominal NominalVoltage Voltage11kV 33kV
i) Rated voltage kV 12 >36
ii) Continuous Operating Voltage kV 10 30
iii) Standard nominal discharge current (8/20 |js) kA 10 10
iv) Line discharge Class 1 1
v) High current impulse (4/10js) - Peak kA 100 100
vi) Steep current (1/20js) maximum kV 40 1 20
impulse residual voltage - peak
vii)Maximum residual voltage at 10kA for(8/20js)
kV 35 110
viii)Switching impulse (30-100/60-200js)maximum residual voltage - peak
kV 30 100
ix) One second TOV withstand capability kV >1.15x12 >1.15x 36
x) Type of housing Insulator Polymeric Polymeric
1) Insulation withstand level
a) Lighting impulse (1.2/50js) voltage - peak kV 75 170
b) Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) kV 28 70
2) Total creepage distance mm 276 828
xi)Energy absorption Capability (with 4/10wave
kJ/kV Not less than 3.2
(b) Power Frequency Voltage vs Time Characteristics
The manufacturer shall provide the power frequency voltage vs timecharacteristics, preheated to 60°C with no prior energy and with prior energy(specified by the manufacturer) in order to verify the TOV capability of theArrester.
If a particular manufacturer is unable to meet the TOV condition of 1.15Ur (ratedvoltage of the Arrester) for 1 sec. duration, has the option of offering of an Arresterof a higher rating.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-43
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6.0 BASIC FEATURES
6.1 Design
The Surge Arresters shall be designed for outdoor service conditions stipulated inClause No. 3 above. They will be connected between phase and earth to protectdistribution transformers and switchgear. It shall be complete with the following:-
a) Clamps suitable to receive Copper/Aluminium (Line) Conductors from 4 mm-16mm
b) The mounting clamps suitable for bracket mounting on a structure made out of100x50x6mm Channel Iron.
6.2 Manufacture
The Surge Arrester shall be of the non-linear metal-oxide resister type withoutspark gaps and the non-linear metal-oxide resister shall be housed in a hermeticallysealed insulator casing to prevent ingress of moisture.
6.3 Insulator Details
The housing insulator of the surge arrester shall be of polymeric type and theinsulator sheds shall be designed to minimize trapping of contamination.
The complete arrester shall withstand a 1000h salt fog test at continuous voltage asdescribed in IEC 61109 / IEC 60507. Additional cycle tests as described inIEC 61109 shall also be passed satisfactorily.
6.4 Moisture Sealing
The manufacturing procedure shall include an effective leak test and themanufacturers shall carry out the Special Thermal Stability Test as specified inIEC 60099-4.
6.5 Partial Discharge
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-44
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Each surge arrester shall be tested to prove absence of partial discharge contactnoise as specified in IEC 60099 - 4.
6.6 Arrester Disconnector
The Surge Arrester shall have a device for disconnecting it from the system in theevent of arrester failure to prevent a persistent fault in the system and it shall give avisible indication when the arrester has failed. The arrester disconnector shall betested as per IEC 60099-1.
6.7 Insulating Bracket
A robust insulating bracket together with suitable mounting clamps to mount theSurge Arrester to 100x50x6mm Channel Iron Cross Arms shall be supplied withthe Surge Arrester. The power frequency withstand voltage of the insulatingbracket shall not be less than 20kV.
7.0 Quality Assurance
1. The manufacture shall posses ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Certification for themanufacture of Surge Arrester for the plant where the manufacture of MCCB isdone. The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISO certificate certified as truecopy of the original by the manufacture, along with the offer.
2. Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, whichshall include, among others, information to meet the following requirement,failing which the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001:2000;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
8.0 Manufacturing Experience
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-45
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience of the manufacture of12 kV & 36 kV Metal Oxide Gapless Arresters and shall have supplied to fewElectricity Utilities internationally during last 5 years. The manufacturer shallsubmit proof documents such as supply records, the name and particular of thepurchasers, quantity sold, and the year of sale.
9.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
9.1 Rating Plate Markings
The following ratings and data of the arresters shall be provided and it shall beweather proof and corrosion proof. The plate shall be positioned at the bottomflange base and visible from the ground level.
(a) Number and year of the standard adopted(b) Rated voltage / frequency(c) Continuous operating voltage(c) Arrester type and discharge class(d) Nominal discharge current(e) Manufacturer's identification (name or trade
mark etc.)(f) Year of manufacture(g) Serial number(h) Contract No.
9.2 Packing
Each set of Surge Arrester shall be packed in a suitable box. Number of theseboxes shall be held together in a firm position and measures shall be taken toavoid damage against jerks and collision between adjacent units duringtransportation.
Each packing shall contain a copy of installation instruction in EnglishLanguage. The voltage rating, manufacturer's name / identification, Country ofOrigin, and the quantity shall be clearly marked on each packing.
10.0 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE OFFER
10.1 The following shall be furnished with the offer.
a) Product Catalogues / Technical literature describing the constructionalfeatures, materials used for components, operational feature of theequipment, indicating the model number etc.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-46
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
b) Energy withstand capability & a description of the test carried out tomeasure the same.
c) Power frequency withstand voltage versus time characteristic curvecovering the time range from 0.1 sec. to 24 minutes.
d) Dimensional drawings of the bracket mounting base, live conductorclamps, earth lead and automatic earth disconnecting device and overalldimensional drawing.
e) Drawing of name plate to scale incorporating the particulars called for.
f)Completed Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars - Annex A
g) A copy of the Manufacturer's ISO 9001 Certificate conforming to Clause7-Quality Assurance
h) Documents to prove manufacturing experience as per Clause 8.0.
10.2 Type Test Certificates
Following Type Test certificates conforming to IEC 60099-4, IEC 60507 and IEC61109 shall also be submitted with the offer.
a) Insulation withstand test,b) Residual voltage tests,c) Long duration current impulse
withstand test,d) Operation duty test,e) Tests of arrester disconnector,f) Partial discharge test,g) Seal leakage test,h) Tracking & erosion test for polymeric insulation
The Type Test Certificates shall clearly identify the equipment concerned showingthe manufacturer's identity. Type Test Report shall include a complete drawingsand the model/type of the offered Arrester.
Type Test Report shall be from a recognized accredited independent testingauthority acceptable to the purchaser.
11.0 SAMPLE
One complete set of the offered model of the surge arrester shall accompany withthe Bid to facilitate analysis and evaluation.
12.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
12.1 Inspection
The successful Bidder shall make necessary arrangements for pre-shipmentinspection and tests by the nominated NEA Inspectors to carry out in his presencethe necessary Sample/Acceptance tests as per Clause 12.2, conforming to IEC
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-47
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
60099-4 on equipment and materials offered. Routine test report as per Clause 12.2shall be furnished for the observation of the Inspector.
12.2 Acceptance/ Sample Test
The following acceptance test for Class 1 surge arrester, as per IEC 60099-4 shallbe witnessed by the NEA Inspector.
a) Power frequency reference voltage testb) Partial discharge test.c) Lightning Impulse Residual voltage test.d) Thermal Stability test
12.3 Routine Test
The following Routine Tests shall be carried out on all the arresters as per IEC60099-4 and the test report shall be made available for the observation of the NEAInspector at the time of inspection.
(a) Power frequency reference voltage test.(b) Residual voltage tests.(c) Partial discharge test.(d) Leakage test
13.0 TECHNICAL LITERATURE, DRAWINGS
Technical Literature in English Language on installation, operation andmaintenance shall be supplied with the Surge Arresters, and they shall bedescriptive and self explanatory, complete with necessary circuit diagrams anddrawings.
S.P.6.2 DISTRIBUTION CUTOUT
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of the design, manufacture,testing, supply and delivery of 12 kV and 36 kV Dropout Fuse Cutouts) completewith fuse carriers and mounting brackets.
2.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
S.No. Description
(a) Nominal Voltage 11kV 33kV
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-48
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
(b) System highest Voltage 12kV 36kV
(c) System frequency 50 Hz. 50 Hz
(d) Number of phases 03 03
(e) Method of earthing Effectively earthed Non effectively earthed
(f) System faults level 20 kA rms 20 kA rms
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS
S.No. Description
(a) Annual average ambient temperature 25 °C
(b) Maximum ambient temperature 470C
(c) Maximum relative humidity 99%
(d) Environmental conditions Humid tropical climate with heavily pollutedatmosphere.
(e) Operational altitude Up to 3000 meters above MSL
4.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
The equipment and the components supplied shall be in accordance with thelatest editions of the Standards specified below and amendments thereof.However the NEA Specification shall supersede these Standards in the eventthere is a discrepancy
(a) IEC 60282-2 (1995) H.V. Fuses - Expulsion and similar fuses(b) IEC 60071-1 (2006) Insulation co-ordination.- Part I Definitions, principles and rules(c) IEC 60071-2 (1996) Insulation co-ordination - Part 2 - Application guide(d) IEC 60273 (1990) Characteristic of indoor & outdoor post insulators for systems
with nominal voltages greater than 1000V.(e) IEC 60694 (2002) Common Specifications for high-voltage switchgear & control
gear standards(e) IEC 60060-2 (1994) High-voltage test techniques -Part 2 Measuring systems
(f) BSEN1461 (1999) Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.
5.0 MINIMUM TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Rated Voltage kV 12 36
(b) Rated Frequency Hz 50 50
(c) Rated continuous current A 100 100
(d) Insulation level:Dry Impulse withstand (1.2kV/50^s) voltage (positive & negative polarity)(peak)
(i) Across the isolating distance of the fuse base kV 85 195
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-49
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
(ii) To earth and between poles kV 75 170
Wet 1 min. Power frequency withstand voltage (rms.)
i) Across the isolating distance of the fuse base kV 32 80
ii) To earth and between poles kV 28 70
(e) Total creepage distance(min) mm 240 720
(f) Mounting angle (to vertical plane) deg 15 ~20 15 ~20
(g) Interrupting rating
(i) Symmetrical interrupting rating (minimum) rms. kA 8.0 6.8
(ii) Asymmetrical interrupting rating (minimum) rms. kA 9.6 10.0
(iii) X/R Ratio 4.0 12.0
NOTE : The minimum values of wet power frequency 50 Hz withstand voltages for 01minute (one) duration should be as stipulated in Table 4 of IEC 60282-2.
6.0 BASIC FEATURES
6.1. General
The Dropout Fuse Cutouts shall be of Class A as per IEC 60282-2. It shall besuitable for use in outdoor circuits under tropical conditions stipulated in Clause3.0 above. The Dropout fuse cutout shall be complying with the minimumtechnical requirements stipulated in Clause 5.0 above.
6.2. Design
i) The Dropout Fuse cutout shall be designed with a solid core, bird proof, onepiece Porcelain Insulator and, it should robust enough to withstand shocksdue to frequent operations. The fuse carrier shall drop-out immediatelyfollowing the blowing of the fuse.
ii) Dropout Fuse cutout within the same voltage class shall be so designed thatfuse carrier together with mounting assembly shall be dimensionallycompatible to facilitate the interchange of fuse carriers of the cutouts ofcorresponding rating.
iii) The Dropout fuse cutouts shall be able to mount on a single channel ironcross arm (100mm x 50mm x 6mm) at an angle of 15 to 20 degrees to thevertical. The whole unit shall be complete with long mounting bracket,bolts, nuts & washers.
iv) Fuse carrier shall be made of high strength fiberglass filament wound tubeor suitable insulating material and it shall be protected from weather andenvironment by a ultraviolet resistant coating. Inside liner of the fuse tubeshall be constructed of a synthetic arc quenching material.
v) Copper Arc Shortening rod shall be attached to the cap of the fuse tube toobtain higher interrupting rating. A removable button head type fuse linkhaving M6x1 thread shall be able to fix to the arc shortening tube.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-50
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
vi) The installation and removal of the fuse carrier shall be facilitated byinserting the operating rod into a lifting eye at the hinge end (lower) of thefuse carrier when it is in the dropped out position. An operating lever eyeshall be provided at the top of the carrier to facilitate a downward pull bythe operating rod to release the latch incorporated in the stationary uppercontact
vii) All castings such as upper and lower moving and fixed contacts, clamp typeterminals, toggle mechanism shall be of phosphor bronze, silicon bronze,aluminum bronze or Silver-plated brass.
6.3. Stationary and Movable Contacts
i) The Stationary and Movable Contact surfaces shall be silver plated to minimizethe contact resistance.
ii) The upper stationary contact assembly shall be provided with a safety latch toprevent the fuse carrier from dropping due to vibration and The upper contactsshall be protected from any airborne contaminants
iii) A back up spring made out of stainless steel or phosphor bronze shall beprovided to ensure constant pressure between the upper stationary contact andthe upper movable contact of the fuse carrier.
iv) The lower stationary contact support and the fuse carrier shall be machined atthe swiveling or axle point to enable the fuse carrier with the fuse link to becorrectly guided into the latching position by an operating rod. The hinge at thestationary contact shall be so designed to prevent the dropping off of the fusecarrier in the drop-out position, due to shock and vibration.
v) A suitable guiding arrangement shall be provided in the upper contact to ensureeasy engagement of the fuse carrier.
vi) The Asymmetrical breaking current ratings shall be permanently marked on theupper metal part.
6.4. Terminals
i) The upper and lower terminals shall be of Bi-metallic type, suitable toaccommodate Copper/Aluminum Conductors of Sizes from 5mm to 14mmdiameter.
ii) The upper terminal shall be positioned to receive the conductor from either side orupward direction while the lower terminal shall be able to receive the conductorfrom either side or downward direction.
iii) The maximum temperature rise for contacts (movable and stationary) shall not bemore than 40°.C and, for terminals the temperature rise shall not be more than 30°
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-51
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
C.
6.5. Galvanizing
All iron and steel parts such as mounting and support brackets, bolts and nuts,washers etc. shall be galvanized after processes such as sawing, shearing, drilling,punching, filling, bending and machining are completed. Galvanizing shall be thehot-dip process to comply with the standard BS EN 1461.
7.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. The manufacture shall posses ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Certification for themanufacture of Dropout Fuse Cutout for the plant where the manufacture ofMCCB is done. The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISO certificate certifiedas true copy of the original by the manufacture, along with the offer.
2. Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, whichshall include, among others, information to meet the following requirement,failing which the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001:2000;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
8.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
8.1. Rating PlateMarkings
The ratings and data of the Dropout Cutout Fuse shall be provided in the ratingplate, which shall be weather and corrosion proof.
The main rating plate near the supporting bracket of the insulator base shall carrythe following information:
1.0 Number and year of the Standard adopted1.1 Rated voltage/Rated maximum current1.2 Class designation/Manufacturer's name or trademark,1.3 Asymmetrical current rating / Symmetrical current rating / X/R Ratio.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-52
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
1.4 Year of manufacture1.5 Contract No.
The following information shall be marked on the fuse carrier.
2.0 Manufacturer's name or trademark2.1 Rated Voltage / Rated frequency2.2 Rated maximum current2.3 Rated breaking capacity (Asymmetrical/Symmetrical current rating & X/R
Ratio).
8.2. Packing
The pre assembled dropout fuse unit (Dropout Fuse Base, Fuse Carrier andMounting Bracket) shall be packed in a suitable hardboard box and the ratedvoltage of the unit shall be clearly marked on the box. Spare fuse carrier shall besupplied in suitable hardboard boxes, the quantity and the voltage rating applicableshall be clearly marked on the boxes.
9.0 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE OFFER
9.1 The following information in the English Language shall be furnished withthe offer.
1. Catalogues describing the equipment and indicating the model number.2. Literature describing the operational and constructional features of the equipment
and materials used for components3. Overall dimensional drawings and separate dimensional drawing of the mounting
arrangement, movable and stationary contacts, clamping terminals, toggle/tonguemechanism and insulator support.
4. Drawing of nameplate to scale, incorporating the particulars called for.5. Completed schedule of guaranteed technical particulars (Annex A).6. A list of names and addresses of the major purchasers of the Dropout Fuse Cutout
during past 5 years of the same Type/Model indicating the quantities supplied,time of delivery.
9.2 Type Test Certificates
Thefollowing Certificates of Type Tests carried out in accordance with the IEC60282-2 and IEC 60060 at areference frequency of 50 Hz where applicable shallbe furnished with the offer.
Dielectric tests;Temperature rise tests;Artificial pollution testsMechanical TestsBreaking tests; 36 kV 12kVSymmetrical current
rating6.8 kA 8.0 kA
Asymmetrical currentrating
10 kA 9.6 kAX/R ratio 12 4.0
The Test Certificate shall indicate the name of the Manufacturer, Type, Modeland the Serial Number of the equipment tested. The test certificates referred to,shall be from an Accredited Independent Testing Authority acceptable to the
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-53
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Purchaser.
Offers of Bidders who fail to furnish the particulars requested in Clause 9.1, 9.2and sample as per Clause 10 shall be rejected.
9.3 SAMPLE
One sample of the model offered of the Dropout Fuse Cutout unit complete withfuse carrier and mounting bracket shall accompany the Bid to facilitate analysisand evaluation.
One sample of spare fuse carrier shall also be provided for each voltage ratingoffered. While analyzing samples, the purchaser reserves the right to checkdimensions, inspect workmanship, and perform tests as prescribed in relevantStandards.
10 INSPECTION AND TESTING
10.1 Inspection
The successful Bidder shall make necessary arrangements for inspection by anEngineer appointed by the Purchaser to carry out in his presence the necessarySample / Acceptance tests on equipment and materials offered. Routine testreports as per IEC 60282-2 shall also be made available for theobservation of the Inspector.
10.2 Sample / Acceptance Tests
The following Sample / Acceptance tests as per IEC 60282-2 shall be witnessedby the Representative of the Purchaser.
(a) Dimensional Verification(b) Dielectric tests(c) Mechanical Tests(d) Measurement of resistance of fuse-links
11. TECHNICAL LITERATURE AND DRAWINGS
All relevant drawings, technical literature, hand-books etc. required forinstallation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment, shall be supplied withthe equipment. Routine test report shall also be supplied with the equipment.
12. ANNEX
Annex A - Expulsion Fuse Cut-out (Drawing: No: 1).
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-54
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Annex CDrawing No. 1
15° -20°
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-54
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Annex CDrawing No. 1
15° -20°
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-54
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Annex CDrawing No. 1
15° -20°
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-55
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Sep
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-55
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Sep
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-55
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Sep
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-56
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
SP 7.0 FUSE LINK1. Scope
This Specification covers the supply of button head fuse links commonly used in theprotection of distribution transformers.
2. Description
2.1 The button-head fuse link shall be fabricated in full compliance with AmericanNational Standard specification ANSI C 37.42-1981, or latest revision thereof orother recognized international standards that ensures at least a substantially equalquality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
2.2 The fuse link shall have fast characteristics and shall be suitable for protection ofdistribution transformers.
2.3 The fuse link shall be supplied in accordance with the type and ratings shown in theBid package.
3. Tests
The distribution cutout and surge arrester shall be tested in accordance with therelevant provisions of the governing standard.
4. Bid Documentation
4.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear copies of governing standards for fabricationand testing of fuse links.
4.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of catalogue of fuse links.
4.3 The Bidder shall furnish a clause-by-clause commentary on specification,specifying compliance and deviations, if any.
4.4 The Bidder shall also furnish with the Bid two (2) copies of the following data withrespect to the fuse links furnished:
a) Time-Current (TC) characteristics curves at 30oC, including minimummelting time and total clearing time.
b) Preloading adjustment factors or curves.c) Ambient temperature adjustment factors or curves.
4.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-57
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 8.0 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacture and testing of Moulded Case CircuitBreakers (MCCB) used in the Low Voltage Overhead Distribution system of theNepal Electricity Authority (NEA) to provide overload and short circuit protectionfor Distribution lines up to Customer Distribution Panel.
2.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
(a) Nominal voltage 400/230 V, 3 ph & Neutral(b) System highest voltage 440/250 V, 3ph & Neutral(c) System frequency 50 Hz(d) Method of earthing Solidly earthed Neutral at substations(e) System fault current 25 kA
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS
(a) Annual average ambienttemperature
300C
(b) Maximum ambient temperature 550C(c) Minimum ambient temperature 0 0C
(d) Maximum relative humidity 99%(e) Environmental condition Humid tropical climate with polluted
atmosphere.
(f) Operational altitude From M.S.L. to 2500 meters above MSL
4.0 APPLICABLE STANDARD
The equipment and components supplied shall be in accordance with the latesteditions of the standards specified below and amendments thereof. However theNEA specification shall supersede these standards in the event there is adiscrepancy.
a) IEC 60947 - 1 (2004 - 03),Part 1: General rules Low -voltage switchgear and control gearb) IEC 60947 - 2 (2006 - 05),Part 2: Circuit –Breakers-Low - voltage switchgear and control
gear
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-58
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) No. of Poles 3 unless otherwisespecified in the PriceSchedule
(b) Rated insulation voltage 750V
(c) Rated frequency 50 Hz
(d) Rated operational voltage 400/230 V(e) Rated insulation level :-
i) Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 us peak) 8 kV
ii) Power frequency Dielectric Test Voltage (rms) 2500V
(f) Rated duty uninterrupted
(g) Rated current adjustment-I1 A (0.8-1)In
(h) Instant opening current adjustment-I2 A 10 x In
(i) Highest nominal short circuit breaking capacity-Icu (400 V) 25KA
(j) (kA rms) 75%
(k) kA peak 52(l) Breaking duration (in short circuit) ms <10
(m) Mechanical Life Operation >15000
(n) Electrical Life Operation >3000
(o) Time current characteristics To co-rdinate with HVfuse.
(p)The MCCB shall not cause any nuisance tripping due to switchingcurrent of motor & capacitor load, and shall have the following TimeCurrent Characteristics:
Multiple of normal currentsetting Tripping time:
1.05, More than 2.5Hrs.
1.1 Less than 2.5 Hrs1.15 More than 1Hr.&Less than 2Hrs.1.2 More than 0.5Hrs. &Less than 2Hrs.
1.3 Less than 30 minutes
1.4 Less than 10 minutes.
2.5 Less than 1 minute.
6.0 Less than 5 seconds.8.0 Less than 40 milliseconds.12.0 Instantaneous (lessthan 20 milli seconds)
(q) Creepage distance suitable for Pollution Degree 3 andsuitable for isolation
(r) Line load reversibility features Yes
(s) Interrupting Capability (IEC category P2)
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-59
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6.0 BASIC FEATURES
6.1 Design
The circuit breakers shall be of three poles unless otherwise specified in the priceschedule, with moulded case design, suitable for operation at a maximum relativehumidity of 99% and at maximum ambient temperature of 55 0C.
The case shall be moulded from insulated material possessing high thermalstability and good mechanical strength, able to withstand robust use withoutfracture or permanent distortion.
The case should be stamped with the letters “NEA” for the purpose ofidentification. The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall be of surface mountingtype and shall be suitable for mounting in an enclosure for outdoor application. Itshall be possible to reverse feed the breaker without any reduction in performance.
The maximum permissible temperature- rise of various components of the breakershall not exceed the values stipulated in IEC 60947 - 1.
6.2 Construction
6.2.1 Operation Mechanism
The circuit breaker shall be provided with trip free features for manual ON-OFFoperation.
The operating mechanism shall be quick make and break type, with the speed ofoperation independent of the operator, and mechanically trip free from theoperating handle so as to prevent the contacts from being held closed against shortcircuit and overload conditions.
The operating mechanism shall be constructed to operate all poles of the breakersimultaneously during, opening, closing and tripping conditions.
The breaker shall be operated by a toggle, which shall clearly indicate the 3positions ON, OFF and TRIPPED.
The breaker shall have current-limiting function which works according tothe opposite magnetic force principle.
6.2.1 Contacts
The MCCB shall be of the uninterrupted duty type and the contacts shall be ofSilver alloy or Silver faced Copper having high current carrying capacity with goodarc resistance property.
6.2.2 Operation
a) Overload Release
Each pole of the MCCB shall be provided with bimetallic Thermal Element orHydraulic Magnetic or Solid State (electronic) type of overload protection with the
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-60
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
tripping time decreasing with increasing tripping current characteristic (inversetime delay).
b) Short Circuit Release
An electro magnetic element type or solid state (electronic) instantaneous shortcircuit protection shall be fitted in each pole assembly affecting immediate trippingof the circuit breaker if the current exceeds the breaking ratings given in table inClause 5.0.
c) Solid state type trip unit
The solid state trip unit shall be suitable for operation in tropical climate stipulatedin Clause 3 above.
It shall be a proven design to provide trouble free operation during the life span ofthe MCCB.
The solid state type trip unit could not be energized by internally mounted currenttransformers. It shall not require any external power supply to operate the trippingmechanism.
In case any problem may occur on solid state trip unit, the MCCB shall haveadditionally electro-mechanic protection for the short-circuit.
6.2.3 Terminals
The terminals of the breaker shall be suitable for front connection of cables andinsulated phase barriers shall be provided for all poles.
(a) Breakers of capacities 160A and below:
Cables are to be fixed to the breaker using palm type lugs with nut and bolt. Allenkey head bolts are not acceptable.
Breaker Capacity (A) Cable Size(mm2)
No. OfCables
upto 30 10 1
Greater than 30 and upto 60 16 1
Greater than 60 and upto100 50 1
Greater than 100 and upto160 70 1
(b) Breakers of capacities 250A and above:
To terminate oversize and multiple cables for circuit breakers of capacities of 250Aand above, suitable tinned copper extenders or spreaders and insulated phasebarriers shall be provided. The standard sizes of the cables and the number ofcables to be used with different capacities of circuit breakers are indicated below.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-61
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Breaker Capacity (A) Cable Size(mm2)
No. OfCables
Greater than 160 and upto 250 95 2
Greater than 250 and upto 400 240 2
Greater than 400 and upto 500 240 2
6.2.4 Mounting Bolts
The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting in outdoor distribution panelsand each breaker shall be furnished complete with one (1) set of bolt fastenings,complete with nuts and lock washers of the correct diameter for the mounting holeand of a length equal to the depth of the MCCB body plus approximately two (2)centimetres.
7. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. The manufacture shall posses ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Certification for themanufacture of Moulded Case Circuit Breakers for the plant where themanufacture of MCCB is done. The Bidder shall furnish a copy of the ISOcertificate certified as true copy of the original by the manufacture, along withthe offer.
4. Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, whichshall include, among others, information to meet the following requirement,failing which the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001:2000;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
8.0 MANUFACTURING EXPERIENCE
Manufacturer should have a minimum of five years experience for manufacturingof MCCB. The manufacturer should submit proof documents such as supply
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-62
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
records, the name of the purchasers, quantity sold, and the year of sale to prove thatthey have supplied the MCCB to minimum of five customers internationally duringlast five years.
9.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENT
9.1 Routine Tests
The following routine tests as per IEC 60947 shall be carried out on all theMCCB and routine test report shall be made available for the observation of theinspector at the time of inspection.
a) Mechanical operation testsb) Dielectric Testsc) Verification of the calibration of releasesd) Temperature rise test
9.2 Rating Plate Markings
Each Circuit Breaker shall be marked in a durable manner with the following dataas stipulated in IEC 60947-2 and shall be visible and legible when the circuitbreaker is installed.
a) Rated currentb) Suitability for isolation, with symbolc) Indication of the open and closed positions
Ultimate breaking capacity (lcu) for various values of the rated operational voltage(Ue) shall be recorded on the device.
The following data should be marked externally on the breaker and they need notvisible when the breaker is installed.
a) Manufactures identification (Name or Trade Mark);b) Type designation or serial number;c) Number and Year of the standard adopted;d) Utilisation categorye) Rated operational Voltage and Frequency;f) Rated service short-circuit breaking capacityg) Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacityh) Rated short-time withstand current/duration
9.3 Packing
The MCCB shall be suitably packed in biodegradable material (cardboard boxes) toprevent damage during transport, handling and storing.
9.4 Storing
The moulded case circuit breakers of different current ratings shall be storedaccording to the serial number and rating in batches of 100 separately so as toselect breakers for acceptance inspection and testing as per Clause 11 by randomsampling method.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-63
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
10.0 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE OFFER
The following shall be furnished with the offer.
a) Catalogues describing the equipment and indicating the model numberand the literature describing the operational features of the equipment.
b) Constructional features, materials used for components and relevanttechnical literature and complete dimensional drawings.
c) Completed Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars. (Annex-A)d) Quality Assurance Certificate conforming to ISO 9001 as stipulated in the
Clause No. 7.0.e) A list of names and addresses of ten leading purchasers outside the country of
manufacture to whom the manufacturer has supplied the MCCB of similartype and design quoted. Give dates and details of such sales made during thelast 05 years.
f) The Characteristics
I) The tripping time-current characteristics curves covering both thermaland magnetic current settings for each type of circuit breaker offered.
II) If over-current and instantaneous releases are of static type, then themanufacture shall furnish evidence that the components used aretropicalised, (suitable for the climatic conditions stipulated in Clause3.0 above) and the field tests on the equipment have been satisfactory.
III) Discriminating table indicating proper co-ordinating shall be submitted.
g) Type test certificates for each ratings of MCCB for;
I) Verification of constructional requirementsII) Verification of temperature-riseIII) Verification of dielectric-propertiesIV) Verification of making and breaking capacitiesV) Verification of short-circuit breaking and making capacitiesVI) Verification of operating limitsVII) Verification of operational performanceVIII) Verification of degree of protection of enclosed equipment
The Type Test Certificates referred to above shall be issued from followingTesting Authority:
h) ASTA Certification Services (UK) or National Metorological Laboratory inUK, accredited to Western European Legal Metrology Corporation.
i) CESI (Centro Electtrotecnico Sperimentale Italiano S.P.A) or NationalMetrological Laboratory in Italy, accredited to Western European LegalMetrology Corporation.
j) ESEF (Ensemble Des Stations D' Essais a' Grande Puissance Francaises) orNational Metrological Laboratory in France, accredited to Western EuropeanLegal Metrology Corporation.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-64
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
k) B.V. KEMA (KEMA) or National Metrological Laboratory in Netherlands,accredited to Western European Legal Metrology Corporation.
l) National Metrological Laboratory in Japan, accredited to National LaboratoryAccreditation System in Japan.
m) National Metrological Laboratory, accredited to American Association forLaboratory Accreditation.
n) The type test from other internationally recognised independent metertest laboratory, such as PTB, Germany; IHP, Turkey; PTP, Austria;NMI, Holland; Falcon Test Lab, UK, Ofgem (formerly known as'Offer"), Ireland, TUV, China, CPRI, India may also be acceptable.
Test Certificates, Performance Curves and Tables etc., of the Type Test performedshall conform to the standard specified, at a reference frequency of 50 Hz whereapplicable.
The Test Certificates should clearly identify the equipment concerned, showing themanufacturer’s identity, Type No. and basic technical parameters.
If the type test report for each ratings of MCCB is not available, the type test report ofsimilar rating of MCCB may be considered acceptable during bid evaluation,provided, the bidder shall upon award of the Contract and prior to mass production ofMCCB, undertake to carry out type test on identical unit of each rating of MCCB inany of above specified testing laboratory or in an independent laboratory accreditedby International Accreditation Corporation (ILAC) of International AccreditationForum (IAF) in the presence of representative appointed by Nepal ElectricityAuthority at all the cost of Supplier.
Failure to furnish the information/particulars requested for in Clause 10.0 willresult in the offer being rejected.
11. INSPECTION, SAMPLING AND TESTING
11.1 Inspection
The successful Bidder shall make necessary arrangements for pre-shipmentinspection by Inspecting engineers sent by the NEA or by an authority acceptableto the NEA to carry out the necessary acceptance tests of the equipment offered.
11.2 Selection of Test Samples
The number of moulded case circuit breakers to be selected by random samplingmethod for acceptance inspection and testing shall be as indicated below.
S. No. No. of units No. ofBatches
No. of samples tobe selected
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-65
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
a) Less than 100 1 3
b) 100-500 5 4
c) 500-1000 10 6d) 1000-1500 15 8e) Above 1500 above 15 10
11.3 Acceptance/ Sample Tests
The following Tests as per IEC 60947 shall be witnessed by the inspectingEngineers.
a) Mechanical Operation tests b) Calibration of releases'c) Temperature rise tests d) Dielectric tests.
12.0 MAKE:
The following makes of MCCB shall be acceptable: Seimens / L & T / ABB /GE Power, Hager, Schneider, CG, Spaceage, Hyundai, Havells, Mitsubishi,Federal, Mitsubishi, Legrand, Chint or equivalent. In case of other make, thebidder shall submit the certification from Independent InternationallyRecognized Agency/ies to substantiate the equivalency to the above referredmake. Failure to furnish the equivalency certification will result in the offerbeing rejected.
13.0 TECHNICAL LITERATURE AND DRAWINGS
All relevant drawings, technical literature, product catalogue, hand-books etc.required for installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment shall besupplied with the equipment. Routine test report shall also be supplied with theequipment.
14.0 GUARANTEE
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the guarantee certificate of 5years obtained from the MCCB Manufacturer
15.0 ANNEX
A- Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-66
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
ANNEX – A
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS(Shall be furnished for each rating)
1 Name of manufacture and country of origin
2 Applicable standard
3 No. of Poles
4 Rated Frequency Hz
5 Rated insulation voltage V
6 Rated continuous operating current A
7
Type;
i) Utilization Category
ii) Standard or Current limiting type
iii) Duty, uninterrupted Yes/ No
8 Rated Short Circuit making capacity kA
9Ultimate Short Circuit breaking capacity at specifiedpower factor, 400V AC
kA
10Service Short Circuit breaking capacity at specifiedpower factor, 400V AC
kA
11 Total fault clearing time ms
12 Type of over current release
13 Type of short circuit release
14 Current setting range of short circuit release kA
15 Whether the solid state trip unit is of the tropicalised type Yes/ No
16
Rated insulation level;
a) Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 peak)
b) Impulse withstand voltage across the open contacts(1.2/50 peak)
c) Power frequency withstand voltage across the opencontacts
17 Material of contacts
18 Clearance between open contacts mm
19 Useable as a Isolator Yes/ No
20 Creepage distance mm
21 Type of Moulded insulating material
22 Clearance between phases mm
23
Overall dimensions Height Length Width mm
mm
mm
24
Mean Service life
I) No. of operations at rated current
II) No. of operations at rated S/C current
25 Applicable cable size (for terminals) mm2
26 Bolts provided with the terminals/ extended bar for Yes/ No
clamping incoming and outgoing cable sockets.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-67
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
27 No. of bolts provided (with the terminals/ bars)
28Whether the extenders or spreaders are provided forbreakers above 250 Amps ratings
Yes/ No
29 Whether the insulated phase barriers are provided Yes/ No
30
Whether the operating toggle clearly indicates thefollowing
Yes/ No Yes/ NoYes/ No
a) ON position
b) OFF position
c) TRIPPED position
31
Whether the operating mechanism is of Yes/ No Yes/ No
I) Independent manual type
II) Trip free type
32Whether the Quality Assurance Certification conformingto ISO:9001 is furnished
Yes/ No
33 Net weight
S.P. 9.0 DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARD1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication, testing and supply of distribution panelboards.
2. Description
2.1 The panel board shall be pole-mounted and used in conjunction with pole-mounteddistribution transformers to house molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)(SPECIFICATION: SP 8.0 feeding 400/230 Volt circuits.
2.2 The manufacturer of panel boards must have been accredited with ISO 9001manufacturing quality certification.
2.3 The panel board shall be rectangular in shape with an entrance door in the front ofthe panel board. The panel board shall be equipped with interior standoffs suitablefor mounting MCCB and for supporting cables. The panel board will be fixed tothe pole by exterior mounting brackets attached to the back of the panel board.Details of these components shall be as specified in the following text.
2.4 The panel board shall be fabricated to provide a degree of protection IP 22, asdefined in IEC: 60529. The panel board shall be provided with means for naturalventilation.
Material
2.5 The panel board case and door shall be fabricated out of steel sheet of minimum 2mm. in thickness and pole mounting brackets shall be fabricated out of mild steelflat of 6 mm. in thickness.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-68
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
2.6 The interior standoffs shall be fabricated of steel sheet of sufficient thickness tosupport installed circuit breaker and cables without lateral movements.
Construction
2.7 The panel board case and all interior and exterior attachment shall be spot-welded.All welding shall be of the highest quality. The panel boards shall be formed andwelded square and all attachments to the interior and exterior surfaces shall bewelded square and perpendicular to the panel attached.
2.8 The panel board shall be so constructed as to be water tight from blowing of free-falling rain. There shall be no apertures in the panel board case other than thoseprovided for the entrance door, cable fittings, or ventilation. The top extension andbottom shall be so formed to provide a drip edge and prevent water form flowingon the respective under-surfaces.
2.9 All individual pieces of metal shall be edge finished prior to assembly to providesurfaces and edges which are free from sharp points and edges. After welding inplace, all welds shall be finished to smooth condition.
3. Panel board Front
3.1 The front panel shall be fabricated as a separate piece containing the panel boarddoor and doorframe. The front shall be attached to the panel board housing bysuitable bolting arrangements to provide a watertight and dust tight seal at theperimeter.
3.2 The door shall be equipped with a gasketed removable door, door-handle lock, andsuitable hinges.
3.3 The door and panel frame shall be so fabricated to provide an integrated structurewhich is warp-resistant and which will maintain dust-tight and watertight seal.
3.4 Gasketing material shall be heat-resistant and shall retain its resilience over time toprecluded degradation of dust-tight and watertight properties.
3.5 The insertable (and removable) door handle shall provide a door a lockingfunction. The handle shall be insulated.
3.5 The door hinge may be continuous type or separate hinge units. However, the typeof hinge furnished must accommodate, and not degrade, the dust-tight andwatertight characteristics and must provide adequate door alignment and supportover time.
4. MCCB Standoffs
4.1 The standoffs shall be shaped and dimensioned to accommodate the MCCBs asrequired by Bid Packages.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-69
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
4.2 The standoffs shall be precisely located.
5. Cable Standoffs
5.1 The cable standoffs shall be properly shaped and dimensioned.
5.2 The standoff shall have the metal edges contoured and smoothed to preventabrasion of applied cable serving.
5.3 The standoff shall be located within the panel board to make allowance for cablebending radii and the location of other components.
6. Bus bars
6.1 The neutral and phase bus bars shall consist of copper bus bar insulated from thepanel board by 600 V porcelain insulators. The copper bus bar shall be of propersize (ampere capacity) and properly dimensioned.
6.2 The bus bars shall be located within the panel board to provide adequate clearancefor the installation and correct functioning of all items.
6.3 If it is required to drill or penetrate the panel board back to install 600 V insulators,the outside of the panel board shall be permanently sealed over the attachment toretain water-tightness.
Cable Entrance Fittings and Knockouts
6.4 Knockouts for cable entrance fittings (bushings) shall be provided in the bottom ofthe panel board.
6.5 All necessary cable entrance fittings shall be supplied for proper connection of allcircuits to fulfill the requirement of the Bid Package. The fittings shall be designedto be suitable for exposed cables entering the panel board from below and shallsecure the cable with inserts to prevent lateral and longitudinal movement of thecables.
6.6 The fittings shall be threaded multi-piece construction which when installed securelylocks the fittings to the panel board. The fittings may be of metal or polymer
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-70
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
material. Metal fittings shall be galvanized or plated as appropriate. The fittinginserts may be single or multi pieces and shall be of material sufficiently elasticand resilient to securely grip the PVC cable sheath without damage. The fittingcomponents shall enable capturing of the inserts to preclude insert creep andfallout due to clamping pressure.
7. Ventilation
7.1 The panel board shall be provided with apertures for natural draft ventilation in thepanel board bottom and in the top overhang.
7.2 The ventilation apertures shall be covered with bronze screen materials of a meshsufficiently to preclude passage of small insects. The edges of the bronze screeningshall be surely fastened to the panel board by means of soldering or epoxyadhesive. The mesh shall be protected during panel board fittings to precludeclogging of mesh openings by finished materials.
Pole Mounting Bracket
7.3 The panel board shall be provided with two (2) pole mounting brackets. The size ofpoles will be confirmed by the Project before manufacturing.
8 Grounding Stud
8.1 The panel board shall be provided with a brass grounding stud located in anapproved locations.
8.2 The grounding stud shall be fitted to the panel board to insure low resistivity andwater tightness of the installation.
8.3 The grounding stud shall be complete with pressure washer, lock washer, and nuts.
9. Finish
9.1 After fabrication, the panel board shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease,mill scale, and weld slag on all interior and exterior surfaces and all surfaces of allcomponents. After thorough cleaning of panel board one (1) coat of red oxidemetal priming paint and two (2) finish coats of paint color shall be thoroughlyapplied. The paint color shall be of light grey. The finish coats shall be of oil basedor epoxy paint. Alternatively, powder coating of panel board may also beacceptable.
9.2 The bronzed screen ventilation holes, working surfaces of door hinge and doorlock, and outside face of grounding stud shall be free from all finishing materials.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-71
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
10. Bid Documentation
10.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of certified fabrication drawings showingall views, section, and dimensions of individual components and assembled panelboard.
10.2 The Bidder shall furnish complete description of all materials to be used, includingcable entrance fittings and finishing materials.
10.3 The Bidder shall furnish a clause-by-clause commentary on specification,specifying compliance and deviations, if any.
10.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-72
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 10.0 PORCELAIN INSULATOR1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of porcelain insulators, as hereinspecified, for use on overhead power line construction.
2. General
2.1 All porcelain insulators shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with theStandards referenced or other national or international standards, for each type ofinsulator.
2.2 Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothlyglazed. The glaze shall be brown in color. The glaze shall cover all exposed parts ofthe insulators.
2.3 The manufacturer of the insulator must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000with design and manufacturing quality certification.
3. Pin Insulator
3.1 The pin insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-1971or the latest version thereof or any other national or international standards thatensures the insulators of at least equal to or better quality than the standardmentioned above, will also be acceptable. The lead thread shall be compatible withthe insulator pin specified in SPECIFICATION: SP-11.0 herein.
The pin insulator shall have following ratings and features:
- Highest System Voltage 12 kV 36 kV
- Rated Voltage 11 kV 33 kV
- Creepage Distance (min) 230 mm 580 mm
- Wet Power FrequencyWithstand Voltage 35 kV 75 kV
- Impulse Withstand Voltage 75 kV 170 kV
- Puncture Power FrequencyVoltage (min) 105 kV 180 kV
- Visible Discharge Voltage 9 kV 27 kV(Effective)
- Cantilever Strength 5 kN 10 kN
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-73
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
- G.I. Pin Head Small LargeIS Ref. S165P IS Ref. L300N
IS: 2486 Part-II
4. Disc Insulator
4.1 The disc insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-
1971 or latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that
ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also
be acceptable.
4.2 The disc insulator shall be ball and socket fitting type. The disc insulator shall meetor exceed the following ratings and features:
- Highest system Voltage 12 kV
- Rate Voltage 11 kV
- Porcelain Diameter (min) 255 mm
- Spacing 145 mm
- Creepage Distance (min) 280 mm
- Power Frequency PunctureWithstand Voltage 1.3 × Actual wet flashover voltage
- Wet Power FrequencyWithstand Voltage 35 kV
- Impulse Withstand Voltage 75 kV
- Puncture Power FrequencyVoltage (min) 105 kV
- Visible Discharge Voltage 9 kV
- Mechanical Strength 45 kN
- Ball and Socket Size 16 mm B
- Applicable Standard forSpecial Characteristics IS: 3188-1980
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-74
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5. Stay Insulator
5.1 The stay insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 5300-1969 or the latest version thereof or any other national or international standards thatensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also beacceptable. The stay insulator shall meet or exceed following ratings and features:
Type 1 Type 2
- Highest System Voltage 36 kV 12 kV
- Rated Voltage 33 kV 11 kV
- Creepage Distance (min) 57 mm 41 mm
- Minimum Failing Load 88 kN 44 kN
- Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 1 minute:
Dry 27 kV 18 kVWet 13 kV 8 kV
- IS Designation C A
6. Tests
6.1 Type test
The Bidders shall include with their offers type test certificates issued by anindependent testing laboratory of repute comprising, among other:
Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage test; Wet power frequency withstand voltage test.
6.2 Routine test
Following routine test shall be carried out on the sample in accordance with thegoverning standard:
Verification of dimensions Temperature cycle test Mechanical tests Puncture test Porosity test
7. Marking
7.1 Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-75
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
a) Name or trademark of manufacturer.b) Year of manufacture.c) Name of the Purchaser as follows: "NEA-RSDSRP"d) Minimum failing load in Newton (for pin and disc insulators only)
7.2 Markings on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
8. Quality Assurance ProgramAlong with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
x. The structure of the organization;xi. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
xii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;xiii. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;xiv. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;xv. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for
the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials aretested, list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
xvi. List of manufacturing facilities available;xvii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;xviii. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
9. Bid Documentation
9.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of porcelain insulators and two (2) clear copiesof all other relevant standards referenced therein.
9.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of all types of porcelain insulatorsas required by governing standards.
9.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) sets of dimensional drawings of all types ofporcelain insulators.
9.4 The Bidder shall provide complete description, catalogue and certified dimensionaldrawings of all types of insulators.
9.5 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-76
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
9.6 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-77
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 11.0 INSULATOR PIN1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of bolt-type, long shank cross-arm insulator pins.
2. Description
2.1 The insulator pin shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with the nominatedstandards or any other national or international standards that ensure at least equal orbetter quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. The insulatorpin shall be furnished with a spring washer, stainless steel split lock and nutassembled on the insulator pin. The ratings and features of the insulator pins shall beas follows:For 11 kV For 33 kV
Head Type Small S165P Large L300NTotal Length 315 mm 450 mm
Stalk Length 165 mm 300 mm
Shank Length 150 mm 150 mmMinimum Failing Load 5 kN 10 kNApplicable Standard IS: 2486 (Part II)
The insulator pins shall be compatible with the pin insulators specified inSPECIFICATION: SP-10.0
2.2 The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design andmanufacturing quality certification.
3. Material
3.1 The insulator pins shall be fabricated from hot rolled steel. The pin shall be a singlepiece, obtained by the process of forging. It shall not be made by jointing, welding,shrink fitting or any other process from more than one piece of material. It shall beof good finish free from flaws and other defects. The finish of the collar shall besuch that a sharp angle between the collar and the shank is avoided.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 All ferrous components except or those made of stainless steel shall be hot dipgalvanized. The threads of nuts and tapped holes, when cut after galvanizing shall bewell oiled and greased. The galvanizing shall conform to IS: 2629-1985 or any otherequivalent national of international standards.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-78
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5. Finish
All insulator pins shall be reasonably smooth on all surfaces and free of sharp projections.
6. Test
6.1 Insulator pins shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486 (Part I).
6.2 Type Tests:
- Visual examination test
- Checking of threads on head
- Galvanizing test
- Mechanical test
6.2 Acceptance Tests:
- Checking of threads on head
- Galvanizing test
- Mechanical test
6.3 Routine Test:
- Visual examination.
7. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for
the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials aretested, list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-79
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normallycarried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;
ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing ofequipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
8. Bid Documentation
8.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of insulator pins and two (2) clear copies of allother relevant standards referenced therein.
8.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of insulator pins as required bygoverning standards.
8.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all types ofinsulator pins.
8.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
8.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-80
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 12.0 DISC INSULATOR FITTINGS(TENSION SET and BRACK STRAP)
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the fabrication and supply of tension type disc insulatorfittings.
2. Description
2.1 The disc insulator fittings shall be supplied with ball and socket couplings (socketeye, ball eye/ball clevis etc.), twisted straps, and bolted type tension clamps.Number of U-bolts in tension set shall be 3 (three).
2.2 Tension clamp shall be suitable for ACSR conductor, diameter ranging from 5 mm.to 16.5 mm.
2.3 The ultimate strength of disc insulator fittings shall be more than 45 kN.
2.4 All components of disc insulator fittings shall be such that they fulfill allrequirements of this specification and compatible with disc insulator specified inSPECIFICATION :SP-11.0
2.5 All parts of different fittings, which provide for interconnection, shall be made suchthat sufficient clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure freemovement of insulator assembly.
2.6 The twisted strap shall be suitable for 50×100×50 mm. cross arm. Size of the holesfor bolt, which anchors twisted strap with cross arm shall be suitable for insulatorpins specified in SPECIFICATION: SP-11.0 and width of the twisted strap shall bedesigned accordingly. Diameter of nuts and bolts of strap shall be equal to shankdiameter of insulator pins. Nuts and bolts shall also be provided with spring washerand split pin.
2.7 Unless otherwise specified in this specifications, disc insulator fittings shall be inaccordance with IS: 2486 (Part I & II) or any other equivalent national orinternational standards.
2.8 The manufacturer of the disc insulator fittings must have been accredited with ISO9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
3. Material
3.1 The tension clamp shall be made of the aluminium alloy type. Other accessorieslike ball eye/ball clevis, socket eye, nuts, and bolts shall be made of hot rolled steeland obtained preferably by process of forging. Twisted cross arm strap shall be
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-81
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
made of MS sheet metal. Cotter bolts and U-bolts shall be of galvanized steel.Cotter pins shall be stainless steel.
3.2 All forging and castings shall be of good finish and free from flaws and other defects.The edges on the outside of fittings, such as at the eye, socket and holes, shall berounded.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those of aluminium alloy and stainless steel,shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or the latest versionthereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal orbetter quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
5. Tests
5.1 The disc insulator fittings shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 2486 (Part I)or any other equivalent national or international standards.
1. Type Test:
- Verification of Dimensions,
- Visual Examination Test
- Slip Strength Test
- Mechanical Test
- Electrical Resistance Test
- Heating Cycle Test
- Galvanizing Test
2. Acceptance Tests:
- Verification of dimensions
- Galvanising Test
- Mechanical Tests
3. Routine Tests:
- Visual Examination Tests
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-82
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
- Routine Mechanical Test6. Marking
6.1 The tension clamp shall be marked on it following:
a) Name or trademark of manufacturerb) Name of the Purchaser as follows: "NEA-RSDSRP"
7. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
8. Bid Documentation
8.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of disc insulator fittings And two (2) clearcopies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
8.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of insulator pins as required bygoverning standards.
8.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all typesof insulator pins.
8.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-83
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
8.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
S.P. 13.0 STAY SET1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of adjustable threaded, galvanized steelstay sets for use in overhead line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The stay set shall consist of mild steel, galvanized stay rod, stay tightener (turnbuckle) or adjustable head, eyebolt for Steel Tubular pole or two-way clamp andtwisted double-eye for steel tubular pole, thimbles complete with stay plate asshown in the conceptual drawings Dwg. CSG17.
2.2 The manufacturer of the Stay Set must have been accredited with ISO 9001 or ISO9002 quality certification.
2.3 The stay rod and stay tightener shall be made of mild steel of minimum ultimatetensile strength of 4200-kg/sq. cm.
2.4 The stay plate shall be square type mild steel plate.
2.5 The thimbles shall be made of 1.219mm (18 SWG) GI sheet.
3. Description
3.1 Conceptual drawings of stay set and its associate hardware are given in Dwg.CSG17, and technical features and dimensions in Table 1.
3.2 The stay rod is either thimble-eye type or twin-eye type. The stay rod and suitablenut shall be fabricated to the shape and dimensions shown in Dwg. CSG17. Thethimble-eye or twin-eye of the stay rod shall be made by drop forged processing.The thread form at the threaded end of the rod, and that of the accompanying nut,shall be optional with the supplier. However, it shall be the responsibility of theSupplier to supply the stay rod with a thread form that shall sustain the rated loads
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-84
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
specified in Table 1 without creep or stripping over the full life of the rod material atspecified diameter.
3.3 The stay tightener shall be fabricated in accordance with the conceptual drawingshown in Dwg. CSG17.
3.4 The eyebolt shall be oval-eye type. The eyebolt shall be made by drop-forgedprocessing. The eyebolt shall be supplied with suitable nut and washer.
3.5 The two-way clamp required for mounting stay set (stay tightnener) in steel tubularpole shall be made of hot-rolled steel flat. The clamp shall be two halve type andshall be provided with two numbers of nuts and bolts, diameter not less than 19 mm.The both ways of the clamp shall be suitable for accommodating two numbers oftwisted double-eye fittings described in Clause 3.5 below. The two-way clamp shallbe following types:
a) Type A: Suitable for pole diameter ranging from 180-230 mm.b) Type B: Suitable for pole diameter ranging from 140-180 mm.
3.6 The twisted double eye shall be made by drop-forged processing. The twisteddouble-eye shall be twisted in 900. The diameter of the steel shall not be less than 16mm., and eye of the twisted-eye shall be suitable for accommodating sty tightener.
3.7 The Stay plate shall be square and the plate shall have a matching hole at the centerto fit the end of the stay rod.
3.8 The thimble shall be suitable for terminating steel stay wire with a preformed grip.
3.9 After galvanizing, the nut and rod threading shall be such that the nut may be run
the full length of the thread without the use of tools.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 All ferrous parts of the stay set shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordancewith IS: 2629-1985 or the latest version thereof or any other national or internationalstandards that ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentionedabove, will also be acceptable.
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated in the relevant referenced standards of steel, the stayset shall undergo following type tests:
- Visual Inspection.- Verification of Dimensions.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-85
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
- Tensile test: The stay set assemblies shall withstand a minimum tensile loadsspecified in Table 1.
- Bend test: The stay rod shall be bend-tested over a mandrel of 19 mmthrough an angle of 90 degrees at any point in the un-threaded section of therod without fracture of the steel. Temperature of the test shall be 22.5 degCelsius.
5.2 Routine tests shall be performed on each batch of the stay sets as per the relevantgoverning standards.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-86
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and two (2) clear copiesof certified dimensional drawings of all the components of the stay set.
7.2 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.3 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-87
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
TABLE 1
RATINGS AND FEATURES
11m 8mLength of stay rod, m. 2.44 1.8Diameter of stay rod, mm. 19 16Ultimate tensile strength of stay rodand tightner (min.), kg/sq. mm.
4200 4200
Minimum breaking load, kg. 10,454 7,272Length of threaded portion, mm. 300 300Thimble shape Suitable for preformed
for 7/8 SWG stay wireSuitable for preformedfor 7/12 SWG stay wire
Thimble section Min.), SWG 18 18Stay plate section, mm. 600×600×6 300×300×6Eyebolt length, mm./1 300 300Galvanization IS: 2629-1985
Note:
1. For the steel tubular pole, two-way pole clamp and twisted double-eye shall beprovided instead of eye-bolt.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-88
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 14.0 STRANDED STAY WIRE
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized stranded steelwire for use in overhead power line as stay wire ropes for line supports.
2. Description
2.1 The steel strand shall be fabricated in accordance with B.S. 183 1972/(1983) or anyrevision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided thatthe resulting steel stock is of equal quality and strength. The minimum tensilestrength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2. The wires shall be 45-ton quality.
2.2 The steel wire strand shall have a left-hand lay. The steel wires shall have no jointthroughout the whole length. Strands shall be uniform and shall have no defects suchas cracks, dust encapsulation or crevices. Further details are given in Table 1 herein.
2.3 The manufacturer of the Stranded Stay Wire must have been accredited withISO 9001 or ISO 9002 quality certification.
3. Galvanizing
3.1 The stranded stay wire shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS:2629-1985 or any revision thereof or any other national or international standardsthat ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will alsobe acceptable.
4. Tests
4.1 The stranded stay wire shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with thegoverning standard.
5. Packaging
5.1 The stranded stay wire shall be furnished in reels holding approximately 300m. Eachreel shall have a weather - resistant tag securely attached showing the length,nominal diameter, number of individual wires, and grade of the strand.
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-89
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of stranded stay wire and two (2) clear copies ofall other relevant standards referenced therein.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of stranded staywire.
7.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of insulator pins as required bygoverning standards.
7.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
TABLE 1
RATING AND FEATURES
11m 8mSteel Wire Size (No. of wire/SWG) 7/12 7/8Grade 700 700Steel quality 45 ton 45 tonDiameter of Wires, mm. 2.64 4.06Minimum Weight, kg/km 300 720Applicable Standard B.S. 183 1972/(1983) B.S. 183 1972/(1983)Galvanization IS: 2629-1985 IS: 2629-1985
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-90
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-91
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 15.0 GALVANISED STEEL BOLTS, NUTS AND
MISCELLANEOUS FASTENING COMPONENTS1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel bolts andnuts, as specified herein, for use in overhead electric line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The bolts and nuts shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 1363(Part I)-1984 or the latest version thereof or any other national or internationalstandards that ensures at least equal or better quality to the standard mentionedabove, will also be acceptable.
3. General
3.1 Bolts and nuts shall be furnished in the types, diameters and lengths specified in theSchedules of Rates and Prices. However, the dimensions and length of threadingof bolt must be confirmed with the Project prior to manufacture.
3.2 Thread forms shall be consistent with all material/items listed herein and shall notstrip or slip under sustained tensile loading equal to the design tensile strength ofthe threaded material item.
3.3 The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design andmanufacturing quality certification.
4. Machine Bolt and Nut
4.1 Each machine bolt shall be furnished with two (2) hexagonal nuts and two (2) plainwashers assembled thereon.
5. Double-Arming Bolt and Nut
5.1 Each double-arming bolt shall be furnished with four (4) hexagonal nuts and two (2)washers assembled thereon.
6. Galvanizing
6.1 The stranded stay wire shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS:2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or internationalstandard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standardmentioned above will also be acceptable.
7. Tests
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-92
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
7.1 The bolt and nut shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevantgoverning standard.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-93
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
8. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
9. Bid Documentation
9.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of bolt and nut and two (2) clear copies of allother relevant standards referenced therein.
9.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of bolt and nut as required bygoverning standards.
9.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all typesof bolt and nut.
9.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
9.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-94
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 16.0 PREFORMED WIRE PRODUCTS FOR STAY SETS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of wire strand grips for stayset commonly used in overhead power line construction.
2. Description
2.1 The design of the preformed wire products specified herein shall be appropriate forthe optimum combination of conductor strand diameter, inside diameter, roddiameter, pitch diameter, number of pitch lengths, direction of lay, and rawmaterials of the specific application.
2.2 The manufacturer of the Preformed Wire Products must have been accredited withISO 9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
2.3 The preformed wire product shall be so designed to grip the designated surfaceevenly, with evenly-spaced gaps, and shall not bridge the gripped surface due toexcessive number of strands in the grip or tie.
3. Steel Wire Strand Grip for Stay Set
3.1 The steel wire strand grip shall be designed for use with thimble eye or double eyestay rod and tightner fabricated in accordance SPECIFICATION: S.P.13.0, stay wirefabricated in accordance with SPECIFICATION: S.P.14.0 (B.S. 183 1972/(1983))and stay insulator fabricated in accordance with SPECIFICATION: S.P.11.0(IS:5300-1969).
3.2 The steel wire strand grip shall be furnished for strand size and grade in accordancewith Table 2.
3.3 The steel wire strand grip shall be manufactured of a galvanized steel wire in cabledloop form with long and short legs. The grip shall have a left-hand lay. Galvanizingshall be equivalent to Class C zinc coating per ASTM A-475.
3.4 The steel wire strand grip shall be color-coded for strand size and length and shallhave one (1) or two (2) crossover marks for different diameter fittings. Anidentification tag shall be attached showing the manufacturer's catalogue numberand applicable strand size.
3. Tests
The performs shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with the relevantgoverning standard.
4. Quality Assurance Program
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-95
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for
the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials aretested, list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
5. Bid Documentation
5.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of preformed wire products and two (2) clearcopies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of preformed wire products asrequired by governing standards.
5.3 The Bidder shall provide complete description, and catalogue of preformed wireproducts.
5.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
5.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
TABLE 1STEEL WIRE STRANDED GRIPS
Tie Application for Strand Size Identification Tag and Color Code7/8 SWG GS-1 Red7/12 SWG GS-2 BlueNote: All designations shown are used for product identification for the purpose of thisIFB.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-96
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 17.0 GROUND RODS AND CLAMPS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel ground rodsand clamps for use in overhead power line construction.
2. Description
Ground Rod
2.1 The ground rod shall be made of high carbon, open-hearth steel so as to achievemaximum strength. It shall be hot dip galvanized.
2.2 The ground rod shall be 19mm in diameter and 4,000mm in overall length.
2.3 The driven end of the ground rod shall have a truncated cone point. The cone pointshall be approximately 13mm long, measured along the axis of the ground rod. Thedriving head of the ground rod shall have an approximate 3 mm, 45 degrees chamfer.
2.4 The manufacturing process shall assure that ground rod does not bend when driveninto hard soils.
Ground Rod Clamp
2.5 The ground rod clamp shall be heavy duty forged steel clamp provided with a hexhead cup point set screw of high strength steel with machine-cut threads. It shall beso manufactured that it gives low resistance connection. The ground rod clamp shallbe galvanized.
2.6 The clamp shall suitably accommodate and clamp a 19 mm. ground rod and astranded grounding conductor of 7/12 SWG size (SPECIFICATION: S.P.18.0).
3. Galvanizing
3.1 The galvanization of ground rod and clamp shall be in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standardprovided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned abovewill also be acceptable.
4. Tests
Grounds rods and clamps shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance withthe relevant governing standard.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-97
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5. Quality Assurance Program
5.1 The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design andmanufacturing quality certification.
5.2 Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
6. Bid Documentation
6.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of grounding rod and clamp and two (2) clearcopies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of ground rods and clampsas required by governing standards.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide catalogue and certified dimensional drawings of all typesof ground rods and clamps.
6.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
6.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-98
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 18.0 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
1. Scope
This specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized stranded steelgrounding conductor for use in the neutral grounding of distribution transformersand body grounding of electrical equipment.
2. Description
2.1 The conductor shall be 7-wire stranded conductor and shall conform to thecharacteristics as specified in Table 1 contained herein. Stranded conductor shall begalvanized.
2.2 The manufacturer of ground Conductor must have been accredited with ISO9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
3. Galvanizing
3.1 The stranded stay wire shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS:2629-1985 or any revision thereof or any other national or international standardsthat ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will alsobe acceptable.
4. Tests
The grounding conductor shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance withthe relevant governing standard.
5. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-99
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normallycarried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;
ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing ofequipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
6. Bid Documentation
6.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of grounding conductor and two (2) clear copiesof all other relevant standards referenced therein.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of groundingconductor.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of grounding conductor asrequired by governing standards.
6.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
6.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
TABLE 1
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
7-No. 12 SWG
Diameter of single strand 2.67 mm
Weight 299 kg/km
Short time fusing current 12 kA
Resistivity 15 Micro-Ohm-cm
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-100
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 19.0 BANDING MATERIALS AND TOOLS
1. Scope
This specification covers the supply of banding strap, buckles and application toolscommonly applied as a fastening and binding system.
2. Description
Banding Strap and Buckle
2.1 The banding strap and buckle shall be made of stainless steel, and shall be:
a) Type 1: 19 mm. in width and 0.7 mm in thickness. Minimum breaking strength ofthe strap shall be 1250 kg minimum. The strap shall be come on strap windermade of weather resistant plastic. The strap winder shall have handle forcarrying, box for buckles and it shall be suitable for field handling. One rollshall contain 50 m. of banding strap. Buckle shall be suitable for use withbanding strap.
b) Type 2: 13 mm. in width and 0.7 mm. in thickness. Minimum breaking strength ofthe strap shall be 850 kg minimum. The strap shall be come on strap windermade of weather resistant plastic. The strap winder shall have handle forcarrying, box for buckles and it shall be suitable for field handling. One rollshall contain 50 m. of banding strap. Buckle shall be suitable for use withbanding strap.
Tools for application of banding strap and buckle
2.2 Tools for application of banding strap and buckle shall be suitably designed andsized for use with stainless steel banding and buckle described in paragraph 2.1above. The tool shall be durable and suitable for long-term outdoor use.
3. Tests
The binding materials shall undergo type and routine tests in accordance with therelevant governing standard.
4. Quality Assurance Program
4.1 The manufacturer of the banding materials and tools must have been accredited withISO 9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
4.1 Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shall
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-101
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
include, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
5. Bid Documentation
5.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of banding materials and tools.
5.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue of banding materialsand tools.
5.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of banding materials and tools asrequired by governing standards.
5.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
5.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-102
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 20.0 COMPRESSION CONNECTORS AND COMPRESSIONTOOLS
1. Scope
This Specification covers the design, testing, and supply of electrical compressionconnectors commonly used in overhead electric power line construction,
2. Description
2.1 Compression connectors shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with therelevant national or international standard.
2.2 The manufacturer of Compression Connectors must have been accredited with ISO9001:2000 with design and manufacturing quality certification.
2.3 The compression connectors shall be designed and manufactured to achieve fullcompatibility between connectors and tools and produce uniform and electricallyefficient connections between conductors for the class of connection intended.Conductor sizes are nominal and allowance shall be made for the actual conductorsizes to be supplied.
2.4 The compression connectors shall be tested in accordance with ANSI StandardC119.4, latest revision, or other equivalent national or international standardspecifying the performance requirements for the electrical and mechanicalcharacteristics of connectors under operating conditions, and shall conform to alltesting requirements of that Standard for the classes of connectors concerned.
2.5 Compression Connectors
The compression connectors for AAAC conductor to AAAC conductor shall bemade of electrical grade aluminium. The connectors shall have sufficient mass andcontact area to provide the thermal capacity required for load cycling and faultcurrent. The connector shall be designed to provide the distributed current densitynecessary to prevent hot spots, and conductivity shall exceed the full load currentrating of the conductors for which they are designed.
Full tension sleeve connectors
The sleeve shall be dual tension (2-piece) for use with AAAC conductors listed inTable 1.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-103
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
For AAAC conductors, the steel sleeve for the conductor core shall be heavily platedfor resistance to corrosion and compatibility with aluminium and shall be abrasivelined for maximum holding strength.For AAAC conductors, the aluminium outer sleeve for 100 sq. mm. AAACconductor shall have a filler hole to permit entering over the steel sleeve and permitinhibitor application. An aluminium hole plug shall be furnished.
The full tension sleeve connector shall be furnished in accordance with Table 1.
The conductor shall achieve the same mechanical strength that of undamagedconductor at connecting point.
Repair Sleeve
The sleeve shall be one-piece aluminium for use with AAAC conductors.
The sleeve shall completely enclose all strands and restore full ampere capacityrating to burned or mechanically-damaged strands.
The repair sleeve shall be furnished in accordance with Table 1.
4. Tests
The compression connectors shall undergo type and routine tests in accordancewith the relevant governing standard.
5. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-104
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-105
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6. Bid Documentation
6.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of compression connectors.
6.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, and catalogue/drawing ofcompression connectors.
6.3 The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of compression connectors asrequired by governing standards.
6.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
6.5 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
TABLE 1
Connectors to be Furnished(Designation) Connector Type AAAC Conductor sizes
A-1T
A-2T
Full Tension Sleeve
Full Tension Sleeve
100 sq. mm.
55 sq. mm
A- 1R
A- 2R
Repair Tension Sleeve
Repair Tension Sleeve
100 sq. mm.
55 sq. mm
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-106
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 21.0 CROSSARMS AND BRACING ANGLES
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel cross-armsand bracing members commonly used in overhead power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The steel cross-arms shall be fabricated from hot rolled channels and angles.
2.2 The steel channels and angles shall be fabricated and tested in accordance withIndian Standards IS: 226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revision thereof or otherequivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal orbetter quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. Theminimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be of sizes shown in the Table 1:Cross-arms and bracing angles, contained herein.
3.2 Conceptual hole pattern and size of holes on cross-arm channels are shown inappropriate drawings herein, however, the Supplier must confirm with the Projectthe locations and sizes of holes prior to the manufacture.
3.3 The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimplingor imperfections. The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be fulldimension after galvanizing and no minus tolerance of specified hole size will beaccepted.
3.3 The steel cross-arm and bracing angles shall be furnished reasonably smooth on allsurfaces and free of burrs or sharp projections.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be galvanized after fabrication inaccordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent nationalor international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to thestandard mentioned above will also be acceptable..
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the channels andangles shall undergo following tests:- Visual Inspection;- Verification of Dimensions;
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-107
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-108
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of channels and angles and two (2) clear copiesof all other relevant standards referenced therein.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and certified dimensionaldrawings of all channels and angles.
7.3 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-109
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
TABLE 1: STEEL CROSSARM CHANNELS AND ANGLE BRACES
S.NO.Description
Type Dimension in mm.Ref.DWG.
1.11 kV, Single Pole, Triangular:1.1 Pole Top1.2 Standard
ChannelChannel
100×50×6.4×5×300100×50×6.4×5×1200
CA1CA2
2. 11 kV, Double Pole:4.1 Standard4.2 Bracing Member4.3 Bracing Member
ChannelAngleAngle
100×50×6.4×5×239040×40×5×207140×40×5×2719
CA3CA4, CA5CA4, CA5
3.Transformer Platform Completeset
ChannelChannel
100×50×6.4×5×2500100×50×6.4×5×1200
CSLV-6A,6B,7
4.Lightening Arrester and Cut-outSupport (at TransformerPlatform): 5.1 Support
Channel 100×50×6.4×5×2348 CA09
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-110
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 22.0 FLAT CROSSARM BRACE
1. Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication, testing and supply of flat, galvanized steelcross-arm braces.
2. Material
2.1 The flat cross-arms brace shall be fabricated out of hot rolled steel flat.
2.2 The steel flat for cross-arms brace shall be fabricated and tested in accordance withIndian Standards IS: 226-1975, and IS-1731-1971 or any revision thereof or otherequivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal orbetter quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. Theminimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The brace shall be furnished reasonably smooth on all surfaces and free of burrs orsharp projections.
3.2 The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimplingor imperfections. The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be fulldimension after galvanizing and no minus tolerance of specified hole size will beaccepted.
3.3 The brace shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3182 kg at the bolt-hole and boltslot.
3.4 The brace shall be capable of being bent 10 degrees at the bolt hole or slot and 140degrees at any point between hole and slot without cracking of the base metal on theoutside of bent portion.
3.5 The brace shall be drilled and dimensioned in accordance with Dwg. CA10 attachedherein.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The flat cross arm brace shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication inaccordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent nationalor international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to thestandard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
5. Tests
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-111
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the flat cross armbrace shall undergo following tests:- Visual Inspection;- Verification of Dimensions;
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governingstandards for fabrication and testing of flat cross arm brace and two (2) clear copiesof all other relevant standards referenced therein.
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and certified dimensionaldrawings of flat cross arm brace.
7.3 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-112
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 23.0 TRANSFORMER PLATFORMS
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the fabrication and supply of transformer platforms used inoverhead power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The transformer platform shall be fabricated from hot rolled channels, angles andsteel members.
2.2 The steel channels and angles for transformer platform shall be fabricated inaccordance with Indian Standards IS: 226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revisionthereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that ensureat least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also beacceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 The platform shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel members, field assembled bybolting.
3.2 The platform will support the transformer above the ground and will be supported bytwo-pole structures of steel tubular or Steel Tubular (STEEL TUBULAR) poles.Transformers will be bolted to the platform at four (4) points. Provision should bemade for the mounting of transformers of different physical dimensions and ratingsup to 200 kVA.
3.3 The platform shall be designed by the supplier and fabricated, in general, inaccordance with the conceptual configuration shown in Dwg. CA12 and CSLV7contained herein. The design shall provide support for a transformer of a minimumof 1500 kg in weight with a minimum safety factor of 2.0. The Platform shall be stiffand shall be capable of withstanding horizontal forces and an overturning momentdue to seismic effects on a transformer with centre of gravity 0.5 meter above itsbase and seismic horizontal acceleration of 0.4g. The platform shall be stiff and shallnot visibly deflect under static loading.
3.4 The platform shall be supplied disassembled, complete with all required membersand fastenings. Packing may be made by banding structural members. Fasteningsshall be separately packed. Structural members shall be clearly identified for ease ofassembly in accordance with the assembly drawing furnished by the supplier.
3.5 The platform shall be suitable for fixing to support poles of 150 to 250 mm diameterin the case of poles, and to STEEL TUBULAR poles of rectangular section with 250to 350 mm in width and 140 to 180 mm depth.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-113
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
4. Galvanizing
4.1 All ferrous parts of transformer platform shall be galvanized after fabrication inaccordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent nationalor international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to thestandard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the transformerplatform shall undergo following tests:
- Visual Inspection;- Verification of Dimensions;
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.1 A preliminary design of the platform shall be submitted with the Bid. Data to besupplied with the preliminary design shall be:
a) Steel classification proposed to be used and the characteristics thereof;b) Two copies of Preliminary detail drawings of the proposed platform;c) Data regarding:
1) Vertical and horizontal loading on poles,2) Resultant safety factor,
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-114
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
3) Resultant deflection,4) Resultant percent of allowable tension, compression, and shear limits for the
steel selected and associated fastening,5) Moments on pole due to seismic effects on the platform and transformers.
7.2 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.3 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-115
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P. 24.0 POLE CLAMPS
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel pole clampswith nuts, bolts and washers for use on overhead power line construction.
2. Material
2.1 The pole clamp shall be fabricated out of hot-rolled steel flat.
2.2 The steel flat for pole clamp shall be fabricated and tested in accordance withIndian Standards IS: 226-1975, and IS-1731-1971 or any revision thereof or otherequivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal orbetter quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable. Theminimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
3. Description
3.1 Outline details of pole clamps are shown in the drawings Dwg: CA13. Dimensionsmay be changed to comply with the final pole sizes selected. Therefore, thedimensions must be confirmed with the Project prior to manufacture.
3.2 Two (2) numbers of galvanized, 16 mm. (dia.) × 60mm. (length), fully threaded boltswith two (2) nuts and washers shall be provided with each pole clamp.
3.3 The fittings shall be free of burrs, splinters, splits, sharp points and edges, which maydamage conductors or show evidence of poor workmanship.
3.4 The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimplingor imperfections. The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be fulldimension after galvanizing and no minus tolerance of specified hole size will beaccepted.
3.5 The pole clamps shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3182 kg at the bolt-holeand bolt slot.
4. Galvanizing
4.1 The pole clamps and nut, bolts and washers shall be galvanized after fabrication inaccordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent nationalor international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to thestandard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-116
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5. Tests
5.1 Apart from the tests indicated herein in the referenced standards, the pole clampsshall undergo following tests:- Visual Inspection;- Verification of Dimensions;
6. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing whichthe Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9001;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
7. Bid Documentation
7.2 The Bidder shall provide a complete description, catalogue and two (2) copies ofcertified dimensional drawings of pole clamps.
7.3 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
7.4 All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be boundseparately from the Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-117
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
S.P.25.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FITTINGS FOR HVOVERHEAD, XLPE COVERED CONDUCTOR
1. ScopeThis Specification covers the fabrication and supply of fittings and associatedapparatus for HV AAAC XLPE covered conductors.
2. Description
2.1 The fittings, hardware andequipment shall be fabricated in accordance withInternational recognized standards such as IEC,NFC forFittings and AssociatedApparatus for use with HV ABC latest revision, and all referenced standards therein,or latest revision thereof or other recognized international standards that ensures atleast a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above, will also beacceptable. The fitting and accessories shall be suitable for 11 kV nominal voltageapplications.
2.2 The Covered Conductor hardware manufacturing company shall have been accreditedwith ISO 9001 quality certification (including design).
2.3 The fittings shall be for use in conjunction with XLPE covered conductor of 100 sq.mm nominal cross-sectional areas.
2.4 Contractor shall get approval of all drawings and hardware sample from Purchaserbefore starting the fabrication of all hardware.
2.5 The fittings and accessories are as follows:
3. Dead End Clamps/ Anchor Clamps
The covered conductors shall be suitable to be tensioned using the tension insulatorstring with bolted/wedge type tension clamp. The bolted type covered conductortension clamps are made of aluminum alloy and suitable for fixing to the 16mm type”A” pin of the ball and socket type disc insulators conforming to IEC 60120/ IEC 383.The purpose of terminating covered conductors over the covering fitting shall include,but are not limited to the cone, bolted or wedge type clamp and preformed helicalfittings. The fittings shall be able to withstand the specific minimum failure load(SMFL) and shall not damage the covering and shall be designed to prevent theingress of moisture during service.
4. Preformed Ties/ Composite Ties
Preformed ties/ Composite ties shall be used for attaching 100 sq mm AAAC XLPEcovered conductors to pin insulators either for straight line position or angle position.The ties for HV covered conductor shall be composite prefabricated type with a whiterigid PVC rod covered by a black resistive conductive layer, no metal parts areallowed. Ties shall be used without removing the sheath of covered conductors. Theyshall combine the necessary mechanical holding function with protection of theconductor sheath from long term deterioration caused by electrical stress. Theelectrical integrity of covered conductor/ insulator system shall be maintained.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-118
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
5. Mid Span Full Tension Joints
Mid span full tension joints are intended to ensure mechanical and electricalconnection between two lengths of same cross section of bare conductors.
Each mid-span full tension joint comprises one aluminum alloy sleeve and agalvanized steel sleeve allowing the hexagonal compression on conductor core andone water tightened system heat shrinkable cover to prevent the penetration of waterinto the covered conductor.
Mid-span full tension joints shall be used for 100 mm2 XLPE AAAC coveredconductor. The Mid-span full tension joints shall be hexagonal compression type.These joints guarantee mechanical and electrical features at least equivalent to those ofthe conductor on which they are installed.
When in use, no conductor failure shall appear next to the mid-span full tension jointsand no conductor slip shall appear at tensile load below the nominal breaking loadvalue of the conductor.
6. Heat Shrinkable Cable End Cap
The insulated end cable cap shall be suitable for effectively sealing the end terminal ofthe covered conductors and shall have wet flashover voltage not less than 11 kV. Thecap shall be heat shrinkable type and the inner diameter of the cap shall be such that itshall tightly fit to the covered conductors to prevent entry of moisture.
7. Insulation piercing connectors
These insulation-piercing connectors are intended to connect two covered conductorswith the same or different cross section between them. The main conductor should bestretched or not. The tap connector shall be a bridge constituted by a not stretchedlinking covered conductor. The insulation piercing connector shall not have losablecomponents that are liable to be lost during installation. The housing shall be madeentirely of mechanical and resistant plastic insulation material and no metallic partoutside the housing is acceptable except for the tightening system. The housing shallbe an integral part of the connector.
The number and the length of the teeth shall be adequate enough to penetrate therelevant covered conductor insulation to establish proper contact without any contractresistance and without the need to strip the covered conductor insulation. To achievethe required water tightness a special rubber seal be provided around the teeth of thepresent connector. The bolts and washers shall be of corrosion resistant type. Thepiercing of insulation shall be simultaneous on main and tap conductor whentightening the bolts. Two different types of piercing connectors are used in coveredconductor which shall be supplied with two bolts.
Main covered conductor to tap covered conductor with capacity from 50 to 120 sq mmboth side
Main bare aluminum conductor to tap covered conductor with capacity main capacity50 to 120 sq mm bare aluminum and tap covered conductor 50 to 120 sq mm.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-119
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
8. Tests
8.1 Type tests
The bidder shall submit the type test report along with the Bid. The report shall beissued by a recognized independent testing authority. The tests shall comply withrelevant IEC/NFC Standard or the governing standard. The Employer also reserves theright to have tests carried out at his own cost by an independent agency, wheneverthere is a dispute regarding the quality of supply. In respect of the following fittings,the test shall include, but not limited to the following:
Dead End clamps:
• Tensile (high tension) test• Aging test• High temperature test (thermal)• Low temperature test
Insulation piercing connectors:
• Dielectric strength• Current carrying capacity of the connector• Temperature rise at the connector• Aging tests• Low temperature test• Mechanical test• Electrical heat cycle test
Insulated cable end caps:
• Verification of water tightness• Aging test
Mid Span Full Tension Joint:• Dielectric strength
• Aging tests• Mechanical test
Tests for other fittings and hardware shall be conducted in accordance with therelevant national or international standards.
8.2 Routine tests
Each batch of fittings shall be subjected to routine tests while manufacturing toconfirm to the specified standard.
9. Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of themanufacturer which includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shallinclude, among others, information to meet the following requirement, failing which
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-120
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of
ISO9000;vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the
raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested,list of test normally carried out on raw materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available;viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections;ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of
equipment specified and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-a-vis the type,special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
10. Bid Documentation
10.1 The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the Standard governingfabrication and testing of the fittings and accessories for LV ABC and two (2) clearcopies of all other relevant standards referenced therein.
10.2 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) sets of complete description, catalogue, dimensionaldrawings showing general construction and size of all fittings and accessories.
10.3 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) clear certified copies of type test report for Dead endclamp/Anchor clamp, Mid span full tension joints, IPC and Cable end caps.
10.4 A clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance anddeviations, if any.
All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately fromthe Bid documents.
Chapter 2. Technical Specification for 11kv lines 2-121
GSEEP/W/ICB-042073/74-04
BLANK
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CHAPTER 31. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.1 SCOPE OF WORKThe whole of the Works supplied under the Contract shall be subject toinspections and tests by the Employer or their Representatives and/or third partyinspectors during manufacture, erection and after completion. The inspections andtests shall include, but not be limited to, the requirements of this section of theSpecifications.The Contractor shall provide all costs, appliances, apparatus, supervision, laborand services necessary to carry out all tests, unless specifically stated otherwise.The Contractor shall furnish the detailed schedule of his commissioning plan atleast one month prior to the scheduled date. The schedule shall include thecommissioning procedures, testing sequences and details of special testingequipment, tests and commissioning record formats, information about relevantstandards etc.The scope of the commissioning program includes the site testing and putting intosuccessful operation of all the equipment supplied under the Contract, for 1kV,AC plants and all secondary voltages systems. Testing of energy meters andcertification of their accuracy shall also be included (if applicable)
1.2 OBJECTIVESThe objectives of commissioning work, prior to the successful energization ofPlant at full voltage and connection to the system, are the following:- Confirm the integrity (correctness) of installation.- Confirm the integrity of insulation, connections and phasing.- Ensure proof of equipment characteristics.- Review workmanship.- Confirm the correct implementation of the design.- Check equipment ratings.- Check and measure resistivity of earthing system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION AND TESTINGTo assure that the supply and services under the scope of this Contract whethermanufactured or performed within the Contractor’s works or at his subcontractor’spremises or at the Site or at any other place of work, are in accordance with theSpecifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance program tocontrol such activities at all points necessary. Such program shall be outlined bythe Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Employer after discussionsbefore the award of the Contract. A quality assurance program of the Contractorshall generally cover, but not be limited to the following:
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
(a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of theproposed quality assurance program.
(b) Documentation control system.(c) Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel.(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components, and selection
of subcontractors’ services including vendor analysis, source inspection,incoming raw materials inspection, and verification of materials purchases.
(e) System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabricationand assembly controls.
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.(g) Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipment.(h) Inspection and test procedure for manufacture.(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.(j) System for quality audits.(k) System for authorizing release of manufactured products to the Employer.(l) System for maintenance of records.(m) System for handling storage and delivery.(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopting
for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of supply.
The quality plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the Employer afterincorporating necessary corrections by the Contractor as may be required.
1.4 Quality Assurance DocumentsThe Contractor shall be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documentsas stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of Employer’s inspection ofmaterial/equipment.The Employer, through his duly authorized representatives, reserves the right tocarry out Quality Audit and Quality Surveillance of the systems and theprocedures of the Contractor’s and the subcontractor’s Quality Management andControl Activities.
1.5 Inspection, Testing and Inspection CertificatesThe provisions of the clauses on Test and Inspection of the General Conditions ofContract and Special Conditions of Contract shall be applicable to the supply anderection portions of the Works. The Employer shall have the right to re-inspect athis expenses, any material though it would have been previously inspected andapproved by him at the Contractor’s works before, and if, after the same areinspected at Site following the latter, material is found defective, then theContractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and reinstatement according tospecification.
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
1.4 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS1.4.1 General
Where no specific test is specified, then the various items of materials andequipment shall be tested in accordance with the relevant British, IEC, orAmerican Standards. Where no appropriate standard is available, tests shall becarried out in accordance with the maker's standard practice, which shall besubject to the Employer’s approval.At least fourteen days’ prior notice, in writing or by tele-fax, shall be given to theEmployer of the readiness of the plant for test or inspection and every facilityshall be provided by the Contractor and sub-Contractor (s) to enable the Employeror their Representative and/or third party inspectors to carry out the inspectionsand witness the tests. This includes progress, test rig and packing inspections also.Inspection of equipment will not be carried out unless the Employer has approvedcopies of the relevant sub-orders, drawings and test procedures. No equipmentshall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the purpose of packingfor shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected, or inspection has beenwaived by the Employer.The extent and method of recording the results shall be agreed by the Employer insufficient time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed or to make anychanges to the proposed program of tests. All instruments and apparatus used inthe performance of the tests shall be subject to the approval of the Employer and,if required by the Employer, shall be calibrated to an agreed standard at alaboratory of national standing to be nominated by the Contractor and approvedby the Employer. The costs of carrying out such calibration shall be borne by theContractor in all cases.The costs of making/performing any test shall be borne by the Contractor. Thisshall apply to tests performed at the site or elsewhere.After receiving the prior information about the completion of manufacturing at thefactory, the Employer will depute his personnel to the Contractor’s factory towitness the fabrication, assembly and testing of any or all parts of majorequipment. The number of the Employer's personnel and equipment to bewitnessed will be as listed below. The duration of such visits shall be as perinspection/testing requirements.
- 11 & 8 m Steel Tubular Poles and accessories- 11 & 8 m PSC Poles and accessories- Distribution transformers- Disc and Pin Insulators- AAAC Conductors- LV ABC cable and accessories- Lightning arresters- DO Fuse Set, Fuse Element- MCCB and Panel Board
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
1.4.2 Test CertificatesWithin 30 days of the completion of any test, triplicate sets of all principal testrecords, test certificates and performance curves shall be supplied to theEmployer.These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for alltests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Employer or hisrepresentative. The information given on such test certificates and curves shall besufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers andshould also bear the Contract reference title. Specified requirements shall beshown on each certificate for comparison with actual test results.When all equipment has been tested, test certificates of all factory and site testsshall be compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an approved formcomplete with index. Three copies of each volume shall be supplied to theEmployer.
1.4.3 Type TestsType tests are required to prove the general design of the equipment and theContractor may submit certificates of such design tests, which have been carriedout on identical equipment. Notwithstanding any provision in BS, IEC or ANSIStandards, the Employer shall have the right to accept such certificates in lieu ofthe specified type tests or to reject them.The type tests prescribed shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost in all cases,where either such certificates are not available or are rejected by the Employer.
1.5 RESPONSIBILITIESTo ensure that the test jurisdiction and transfer of responsibilities is regulated bystrict safety and handover procedures, the Contractor agrees the interface with theEmployer to establish and implement handover procedures consistent with theterms of these Specifications.The Employer shall retain full jurisdiction over all commissioning activities,which may affect the operation of the existing system. In these circumstances andwhen so requested, shall provide technical advices and assistances.The Contractor shall be responsible for technical guidance and assistance inestablishing the scope and method of tests, witnessing of the testing, assessment ofresults, and re-negotiation of the changes in test schedules which may benecessary as a result of other circumstances, such as delays in the delivery,possible equipment failures.
1.6 SAFETY PROCEDURESThe Contractor shall share the responsibility for safety procedures with the
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
Employer. The Contractor shall establish and implement a work permit andtagging system and associated safety procedures (subject to the review ofEmployer) for all equipment, systems and areas not covered by the Employer’ssafety procedures.The Employer will assume responsibility for the establishment andimplementation of tagging, safety and work permit procedures for the protectionof personnel and equipment, as soon as equipment and systems are connected toor are energizeable from the existing system.
1.7 COMMISSIONING STAFFThe Contractor shall provide commissioning personnel including skilled andunskilled labor as required. Submit a list with names, experience and proposedduration of the stay of key personnel on site, consistent with the constructionschedule, along with the commissioning program.Ensure that only staffs assigned to commissioning fulfills that duty for theduration of the assignment.Ensure that commissioning staffs have authorization, and the competence, toundertake minor repairs or to make temporary redesigns and to reconnect systemsto meet the specified system performance to preclude delays in energization andputting into commercial service of any part of the works.
1.8 TEST EQUIPMENTThe Contractor shall ensure that all instruments, tools and other equipmentrequired for testing and commissioning are available on site, ensure that the testequipment is of satisfactory quality and condition and, where necessary, iscalibrated by an approved authority or standard.Make arrangements for the provision of power supplies for testing with necessaryvector configuration, voltage and current rating.
1.9 COMMISSIONING PROGRAMPrepare a commissioning program for approval by the Employer and forincorporation into the Project master construction program. Allocate adequatetime in this program to permit full commissioning of all components.Carry out all testing during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests,which involve existing apparatus and system outages, may be carried out outsidenormal working hours. Give the Employer sufficient notice to allow for thenecessary outage arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing program.Note that no tests listed in the agreed program will be waived except upon theinstructions or consent of the Employer in writing.
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
1.9.1 Test ProceduresThe following basic tests, in addition to others, shall be carried out:- Measurement of insulation resistance.- AC withstand voltage test
1.9.2 Requirements for Field TestsThe field tests shall be carried out in presence of Employer under the followingconditions:AC withstand test voltages for conductors and outdoor equipment shall be normaloperation voltage of the transmission line and, withstand voltage test shall becarried out for ten (10) minutes by the normal voltage mentioned above. The fieldtests shall be carried out by the Contractor after adjustment of all the equipmenthave been completed.Expandable and lead wires and other materials required for the field tests shall bearranged by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing allmeasuring instruments, test equipment and tools required for the tests.Preparation of the test record sheets and test reports shall be the responsibility ofthe Contractor and the results of the field tests shall be submitted by theContractor for Employer’s approval.Measurement of insulation resistance of the equipment shall be performed by atleast 1000 V megger.After completion of the measurement of insulation resistance mentioned above, acwithstand voltage test shall be performed by the normal operation voltage of theexisting power system.Submit test procedures, consisting of detailed test methods and samples of therelated test record forms, for all equipment to be tested, to the Employer forapproval along with the commissioning program. Strictly adhere to theseprocedures for the commissioning tests.
1.9.3 RecordsMaintain an up-to-date record of all commissioning activities on site.Record the results of the tests clearly on forms and formats approved by theEmployer and with clear references to the equipment and items tested, so that therecord can be used as the basis for maintenance tests, in future. Submit therequired number of site test records to the Employer as soon as possible aftercompletion of the tests.Record the details of the test equipment and instruments used in the test sheets, inthose cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearingon the test results.
1.9.4 “As-Built” DrawingsKeep an ongoing record of all changes on a master set of drawings. Produce and
Chapter 3. Inspection, Testing and Commissioning 3-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-207/73-03
supply a minimum of three complete sets of marked-up “As Constructed/As-Built” drawings before leaving the Site. Correct and re-issue the original drawingsas soon as possible as per this specification.
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Chapter 4
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
(Guaranteed Technical Particulars)
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 1: Steel Tubular Poles
(To be completed by Bidder)Tubular Steel Poles
S.No. Description Unit 10m. 8m.a) Manufacturerb) Governing Standards for tubing
Manufacturing and Testingc) Governing Standard for Galvanizationd) Copies of Standards Attached? Yes/Noe) Overall Length (m)f) Sections details:
(i) Length, mTop ( h1)
Middle (h2)Bottom (h3)
ii) Outside Diameter, mmTop ( h1)Middle (h2)Bottom (h3)
iii) Thickness, mmTop ( h1)Middle (h2)Bottom (h3)Approximate weight, Kg
Criplling load, kgfApplication of load fromtop of pole, m
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No.2: Pre-stressed Concrete Pole(To be completed by Bidder)
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Reference Standard
3. Overall Length meters
4. Dimensions: 11m 8m
- Top Width mm
- Bottom Width mm
- Pole thickness mm
5. Weight of the pole kg6. Guaranteed minimum Transverse
Failure Load kgf
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 3. : AAAC(To be completed by bidder)
Item Description AAAC Conductor Unit1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standards
3. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
4. Copies of type test attached? Yes/No
5.
If standards is not BS:215(Part II)are conductor specifications sameas the BS:215 requirements inrespect of the following?:
Diameter Yes/No
Strand size Yes/No
Direction of lay Yes/No
Lay ratio Yes/No
Materials Yes/No
6. Technical data:
100 sqmm 55 sqmm
Nominal diameter (mm)
Stranding (Al/Steel)
Breaking strength (kN)
Mass (kg/km)
Resistance at 20o C
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 3. : AAAC Conductor Assessories(To be completed by bidder)
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 4 : Distribution Transformer(To be completed by bidder)
Item Description (11/0.4 kV, 25 KVA)
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of IEC standards attached? Yes/No
3. Copies of type test for each rating attached? Yes/No
4. Copies of outline drawingsfor each size attached? Yes/No
5. Winding material: ________
6. Primary Winding BIL _________kV
7. Primary Bushing BIL __________kV
8. Accessories listed below furnished?
a) Lower oil filter valve Yes/No
b) Liquid level guage Yes/No
c) Lifting lugs Yes/No
d) Hand hole Yes/No
e) Tank earthing terminal Yes/No
f) Overload protection Yes/NoIf yes, details attached? Yes/No
9. Testing facilities available
Description Name of the test equipment/facility
a) Applied voltage test
b) Induced voltage test
c) No load loss and excitation current test
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
d) Impedance voltage and load loss tests
e) Resistance measurement
f) Ratio tests
g) Polarity and phase relation tests
h) Leakage tests
i) Insulation resistance tests
10. Design information
Rated kVA (IEC rating), kVA…………………..Number of phases …..............................………..Frequency, Hz ......................Voltage ratio at no-load , kV................................Winding connections.............................................
Type of core sheet……………………………
Magnetising current at normal ratio:hv, Amp ………….lv, Amp …………..
Maximum flux density in core iron at normalvoltage and frequency based on the net section of iron:Cores, T ……………………Yokes, T …………………..
Type of winding:hv .. ………………………..lv ………………………….
Maximum current density in winding at rated power:hv, Amp/mm2 …………………….lv, Amp/mm2 ……………………..
Type of insulation used for:hv winding ……………………….lv winding ………………………..
No-load loss at normal voltage ratio and 75oC, Watt ...................Load loss at rated current and at 75oC, Watt ...................
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Regulation at 75oC and rated power as a percentage of normal voltage:at 1 p.f, % ………………
qt 0.8 p.f, % …………….
Impedance voltage at 75oC and rated power:at normal tapping,% ………………..at -5% tapping % ……………………at +5% tapping % ……………………
Efficiency at 1 p.f 125% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 100% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 75% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 50% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 25% and rated current, % .............Temperature rise at rated kVA byThermometer in oil ........................................Temperature rise at rated kVA byresistance of windings ....................................Permissible overload ........................................Transformer insulating oil specification …………………...Total volume of insulating oil at 20oC, litre ……………..…Effective expansion capacity of conservator, litre ………….
11 Approximate weight and dimensions
Transformer core and windings, kg..................Tank and fittings, kg.................Oil , kg..................Total weight, kg..................Thickness of tank sides, mm …………Thickness of tank bottom, mm ………Thickness of radiator, mm……………Approximate dimensions including fittings:
Overall length, mm..................Overall width, mm..................Overall height, mm..................
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
2) Item Description (11/0.4 kV, 50 KVA)
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of IEC standards attached? Yes/No
3. Copies of type test for each rating attached? Yes/No
4. Copies of outline drawingsfor each size attached? Yes/No
5. Winding material: ________
6. Primary Winding BIL _________kV
7. Primary Bushing BIL __________kV
8. Accessories listed below furnished?
a) Lower oil filter valve Yes/No
b) Liquid level guage Yes/No
c) Lifting lugs Yes/No
d) Hand hole Yes/No
e) Tank earthing terminal Yes/No
f) Overload protection Yes/NoIf yes, details attached? Yes/No
9. Testing facilities available
Description Name of the test equipment/facility
Applied voltage testInduced voltage testNo load loss and excitation current testImpedance voltage and load loss testsResistance measurementRatio testsPolarity and phase relation testsLeakage testsInsulation resistance tests
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
10. Design information
Rated kVA (IEC rating), kVA…………………..Number of phases …..............................………..Frequency, Hz ......................Voltage ratio at no-load , kV................................Winding connections.............................................
Type of core sheet……………………………
Magnetising current at normal ratio:hv, Amp ………….lv, Amp …………..
Maximum flux density in core iron at normalvoltage and frequency based on the net section of iron:Cores, T ……………………Yokes, T …………………..
Type of winding:hv .. ………………………..lv ………………………….
Maximum current density in winding at rated power:hv, Amp/mm2 …………………….lv, Amp/mm2 ……………………..
Type of insulation used for:hv winding ……………………….lv winding ………………………..
No-load loss at normal voltage ratio and 75oC, Watt ...................Load loss at rated current and at 75oC, Watt ...................
Regulation at 75oC and rated power as a percentage of normal voltage:at 1 p.f, % ………………
qt 0.8 p.f, % …………….
Impedance voltage at 75oC and rated power:at normal tapping,% ………………..at -5% tapping % ……………………at +5% tapping % ……………………
Efficiency at 1 p.f 125% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 100% and rated current, % .............
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-10
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Efficiency at 1 p.f 75% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 50% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 25% and rated current, % .............Temperature rise at rated kVA bythermometer in oil ........................................Temperature rise at rated kVA byresistance of windings ....................................Permissible overload ........................................Transformer insulating oil specification …………………...Total volume of insulating oil at 20oC, litre ……………..…Effective expansion capacity of conservator, litre ………….
11 Approximate weight and dimensions
Transformer core and windings, kg..................Tank and fittings, kg.................Oil , kg..................Total weight, kg..................Thickness of tank sides, mm …………Thickness of tank bottom, mm ………Thickness of radiator, mm……………Approximate dimensions including fittings:
Overall length, mm..................Overall width, mm..................Overall height, mm..................
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-11
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
2) Item Description (11/0.4 kV,100 KVA)
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of IEC standards attached? Yes/No
3. Copies of type test for each rating attached? Yes/No
4. Copies of outline drawingsfor each size attached? Yes/No
5. Winding material: ________
6. Primary Winding BIL _________kV
7. Primary Bushing BIL __________kV
8. Accessories listed below furnished?
a) Lower oil filter valve Yes/No
b) Liquid level guage Yes/No
c) Lifting lugs Yes/No
d) Hand hole Yes/No
e) Tank earthing terminal Yes/No
f) Overload protection Yes/NoIf yes, details attached? Yes/No
9. Testing facilities available
Description Name of the test equipment/facility
Applied voltage testInduced voltage testNo load loss and excitation current testImpedance voltage and load loss testsResistance measurementRatio testsPolarity and phase relation testsLeakage testsInsulation resistance tests
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-12
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
10. Design information
Rated kVA (IEC rating), kVA…………………..Number of phases …..............................………..Frequency, Hz ......................Voltage ratio at no-load , kV................................Winding connections.............................................
Type of core sheet……………………………
Magnetising current at normal ratio:hv, Amp ………….lv, Amp …………..
Maximum flux density in core iron at normalvoltage and frequency based on the net section of iron:Cores, T ……………………Yokes, T …………………..
Type of winding:hv .. ………………………..lv ………………………….
Maximum current density in winding at rated power:hv, Amp/mm2 …………………….lv, Amp/mm2 ……………………..
Type of insulation used for:hv winding ……………………….lv winding ………………………..
No-load loss at normal voltage ratio and 75oC, Watt ...................Load loss at rated current and at 75oC, Watt ...................
Regulation at 75oC and rated power as a percentage of normal voltage:at 1 p.f, % ………………
qt 0.8 p.f, % …………….
Impedance voltage at 75oC and rated power:at normal tapping,% ………………..at -5% tapping % ……………………at +5% tapping % ……………………
Efficiency at 1 p.f 125% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 100% and rated current, % .............
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-13
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Efficiency at 1 p.f 75% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 50% and rated current, % .............Efficiency at 1 p.f 25% and rated current, % .............Temperature rise at rated kVA bythermometer in oil ........................................Temperature rise at rated kVA byresistance of windings ....................................Permissible overload ........................................Transformer insulating oil specification …………………...Total volume of insulating oil at 20oC, litre ……………..…Effective expansion capacity of conservator, litre ………….
11. Approximate weight and dimensions
Transformer core and windings, kg..................Tank and fittings, kg.................Oil , kg..................Total weight, kg..................Thickness of tank sides, mm …………Thickness of tank bottom, mm ………Thickness of radiator, mm……………Approximate dimensions including fittings:
Overall length, mm..................Overall width, mm..................Overall height, mm..................
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-14
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 5. : Pin Insulator(To be completed by bidder)
Item Pin Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ Dimensional drawings Yes/No
3. Governing Standards
4. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
5. Copies of type testattached ? Yes/No
6. Marking as per specifications Yes/No
7. Ratings:
Highest System Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Creepage Distance (min) mm
Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV
Impulse Withstand Voltage kV
Puncture Power Frequency Voltage (min) kV
Visible Discharge Voltage (Effective) kV
Cantilever Strength kN
G.I. Pin Head
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-15
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 6. : Disc Insulator(To be completed by bidder)
Item Disc InsulatorDescription Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog/Dimensional drawings Yes/No
3. Governing Standards
4. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
5. Copies of type testattached? Yes/No
6. Marking as per specifications Yes/No
7. Ratings:
Highest system Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Porcelain Diameter (min) kV
Spacing mm
Creepage Distance (min) mm
Power Frequency PunctureWithstand Voltage kV
Wet Power FrequencyWithstand Voltage kV
Impulse Withstand Voltage kV
Puncture Power Frequency Voltage (min) kV
Visible Discharge Voltage kV
Mechanical Strength kN
Ball and Socket Size mmApplicable Standard
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-16
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 7. : Stay Insulator(To be completed by bidder)
Item Stay Insulator
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog/Dimensional drawings Yes/No
3. Governing Standards
4. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
5. Copies of type testattached? Yes/No
6. Marking as per specifications Yes/No
7. Ratings:
Highest System Voltage kV
Rated Voltage kV
Creepage Distance (min) mm
Minimum Failing Load kN
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 1 minute:
Dry kVWet kV
IS Designation
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-17
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 8. : Insulator Pins(To be completed by bidder)
Item Insulator Pins
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Type of Steel Used
3. Dimensional drawingsattached? Yes/No
4 Governing Standard
5. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
6. Copies of type testattached? Yes/No
7. Ratings and Features:
For 11 kV For 33 kV
Head Type
Total Length (mm)
Stalk Length (mm)
Shank Length (mm)
Minimum Failing Load (kN)
Applicable Standard
Catalogue Number
IS reference
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-18
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 9. : Disc Insulator Fittings(To be completed by bidder)
Item Disc Insulator Fittings
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer/Catalogue No.
2. Dimensional drawingsattached? Yes/No
3. Governing Standard
4. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
5. Copies of type testattached? Yes/No
6. Steel Classification
7. Aluminum Alloy Tension Clamp Yes/No
8. Ferrous parts are galvanized? Yes/No
9. Cotter Pins are Stainless Steel? Yes/No
10. Ultimate Strength of Clamps Kn
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-19
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 10: Ground (Earth Rods and Clamps)(To be completed by bidder)
Item Ground (Earth Rods and Clamps)
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Standards attached? Yes/No
6. Catalogue/ dimensional drawingsattached for all items? Yes/No
7. Dimensions (Ground Rod):
Length mm.Diameter mm.
8. Catalogue number
RodClamp
9. Copies of type test resultsattached? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-20
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 11 : Grounding Conductor(To be completed by bidder)
Item Grounding Conductor
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
3. Governing Standard for galvanization
4. Standards attached? Yes/No
5. Diameter mm
6. Cross Section sq. mm
7. Short time fusing30 cycles Amps
8. Weight (Approx.) kg/km
9. Resistance20 degree C (Approx.) ohms/km
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-21
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 12 : Compression Connectors(To be completed by bidder)
Item Compression Connectors
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
4. Standards attached? Yes/No
5. Catalogue/ dimensional drawingsattached? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-22
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 13 : LV ABC Cable(To be completed by Bidder)
Item LV ABC
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue/ drawings Yes/No
3. Governing Standards
4. Copies of Standards Attached: Yes/No
5. Copies of type testattached? Yes/No
6. Rated Voltage kV
7. No. of Cores
8. Conductor
9. Nominal cross-sectional area mm2 95 50 25
10. Diameter of conductor-minimum mm-maximum mm
11. Minimum breaking load of conductor kN
12. Minimum breaking load of cable kN
13. Min. thickness of XLPE insulation at any point mm(excluding ribs)
14. Max. thickness of XLPE insulation at any point mm(excluding ribs)
15. Maximum overall diameter of the core mm(excluding ribs)
16. Approximate net weight per meter kg
17. Max. continuous current carrying capacity Aper phase
18. Maximum conductor dc resistance at 20 deg. C /km
19. Maximum conductor ac resistance at 80 deg. C/km
20. Positive sequence reactance of cable at 50 Hz /km
21. Minimum insulation resistance M-km
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-23
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 14 : Stay Set(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Stay Set
Description Unit Stay Set (19 mm.) Stay Set (16 mm.)
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog Numbers
3. Steel Classification
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Load rating, kg.
6. Type tests-tensile load Yes/No Yes/Nodata attached?
7. Type test-bend testdata attached ? Yes/No Yes/No
8. Dimensional drawing attached? Yes/No Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-24
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 15 : Steel Wire Strand(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Steel Wire Strand
Description Unit 7/8 SWG 7/12 SWG
1. Manufacturer
2. Strand diameter (overall) mm
3. No. of Strands
4. Minimum Breaking load kg
5. Nominal diameter of coated mmwire in strand
6. Left hand lay Yes/No
7. Governing Standard for manufacturing Yes/Noand testing
8. Governing Standard for galvanization
9. Standards attached? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-25
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 16 : Galvanized Steel Nuts and Bolts(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Galvanized Steel Nuts and Bolts
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Standards attached? Yes/No
6. Catalog numbers attachedfor all items? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-26
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 17 : Performed Wire Products(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Preformed Wire Products
Description Unit
a) Pin Insulator Tie
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Aluminum-clad steel wire Yes/No
4. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
5. Standards attached? Yes/No
6. Catalog numbers attachedfor all items? Yes/No
7. Bidder certifies thatall items offered aresuitable for use with100, 55 & 30 sq. mm. AAAC Yes/No
8. Bidder certifies thatall items offered aresuitable for use withinsulators specifiedSPECIFICATION- SP3.1.1 Yes/No
9. Holding strength: Kilogramssizes 100 sq.mm 55 sq.mm
Top Tie
Double Support Top Tie
Side Tie
Double Side Tie
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-27
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
b) Steel Wire Strand Grip
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Standards attached? Yes/No
6. Catalogue numbers attachedfor all items? Yes/No
7. Bidder certifies thatsteel strand grip offered issuitable for use withinsulator, stay set and stay wirespecified in SPECIFICATIONS: Yes/NoSP3.1.1, SP3.2.1 and SP3.2.2respectively
8. Holding rating of grip kg
a) 7/8 SWG
b) 7/12 SWG
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-28
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 18 : Compression Connectors(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Compression Connectors
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/Nofurnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturingand testing
4. Standards attached? Yes/No
5. Catalog/ dimensional drawingsattached? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-29
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 19 : Cross-arm and angle(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Cross-arm and angle
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Steel Classification
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the cross arm and angles fabricated fromhot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
5. Governing Standard
6. Standard attached? Yes/No
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Drawings of cross arm and bracing? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-30
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 20 : Flat cross-arm brace(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Flat cross-arm brace
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Steel Classification
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the flat cross arm brace fabricated fromhot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
5. Governing Standard for manufacturing andtesting
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Standards attached? Yes/No
8. Drawings of flat cross arm brace? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-31
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 21: Transformer Platform(To be completed by the Bidder)
Item Transformer Platform
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Preliminary details dwg.furnished? Yes/No
3. Steel Classification/Characteristics furnished? Yes/No
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Vertical Load on pole
6. Resultant Safety Factor
7. Resultant Deflection at design load mm
8. % of allowable tension
9. % of allowable compression
10. % of allowable shear limits
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-32
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Item No. 22: Pole Clamps(To be completed by Bidder)
Item Pole Clamps
Description Unit
1. Manufacturer
2. Steel Classification
3. Governing Standard for galvanization
4. Drawings of Pole Clampfurnished? Yes/No
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-33
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars for LightiningArrester
(To be filled by the Bidder for the offered Arrester)
1) Name of manufacturer and country of origin
2) Rated voltage (kV)
3) Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) (kV)
4) Whether Type Test Reports as per cl. 10.2 is furnished (Yes/No)
5) Classification of arrester As per IEC 60099-4
6) Arrester housing;
a) Material
b) Insulation withstand level
i) Lighting impulse (1.2/50js) withstand voltage (kV peak)
ii) Power frequency wet withstand voltage (kV)
c) Total creepage distance mm
7) High current impulse (4/10|js) withstand level (kA peak)
8) Standard nominal discharge current (8/20js) kA
9) Energy absorption Capability (with 4/10 wave shape) at Uc kJ/kV
10) Steep current (1/20js) maximum impulse residual voltage (kV peak)
11) Maximum residual voltage at 10kA for (8/20js) (kV peak)
12) Switching impulse (30-100/60-200js) maximum residual voltage (kV peak)
13) Pressure relief class (Minimum prospective symmetrical fault current) kA
14)
Arrester terminals
a) Type of material
b) Applicable conductor size. mm2
15) Dimensions/ Approximate weight of LA (mm x mm), kg
16)
Insulating Bracket
a) Power frequency withstand voltage (kV)
b) Cantilever strength (Nm)
17) Whether the arrester earth lead for disconnector provided; Yes/No
18)Whether the power frequency withstand voltage versus timecharacteristics curve as per class 10.1(c)
Yes/No
19) Whether the ISO 9001 Certificate as per Clause 7.0 is furnished Yes/No
20)Whether the acceptance tests as per Clause 12.2 will be carried out at thetime of inspection Place of testing
(Yes/No)
Whether the rating plate marking as per Clause 9.1 provided. Yes/No
Seal and Signature of the Manufacturer:Date:
Chapter 4. Technical Data Sheet 4-34
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARSFOR DROPOUT FUSE CUTOUTS
(To be filled by the Bidder for each type)
12 kV 36 kV
A Name of Manufacturer & Country of OriginB Class DesignationC Model/Catalogue No
D Rated Voltage kV
E Rated continuous current A
F Rated frequency Hz
G Mounting Angle to the vertical deg
H Type, Size and Material of
i) Upper Terminal Clamps
ii) Lower Terminal Clamps
iii) Moving Contacts
iv) Fixed ContactsI Temperature rise for Contacts
1) Upper °C2) Lower °CTemperature rise for Terminals °C
1) Upper °C
2) Lower °CJ Symmetrical / Asymmetrical (rms) interrupting rating at specified X/R ratio kA
K Insulation levelDry Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 ^s peak (positive & negative polarity)
i) Across the isolating distance of the fuse base +kV
-kVii) To earth and between poles +kV
-kVDry and wet 1 min. Power frequency (50 Hz) withstand voltage kV rms.i) Across the isolating distance of the Fuse base - Dry kV
Across the isolating distance of the Fuse base -Wet kVii) To earth and between poles -Dry kV
To earth and between poles -Wet kV
L Total creepage distance mm
M Type of Mounting Bracket
N Galvanizing thickness mmO Type Test Certificates conforming to Clause 9.2 furnished Yes/
NoP Fuse Carrier Length “ L” as per Drawing 1 mm
Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer/BidderDate
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CHAPTER 5
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CHAPTER-5
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
Sl.No. Subject Page No.
1. General Instruction 5-1A. General 5-1B. Pole Numbering 5-1
2. POLES, ARMS AND STAYS 5-2A. Poles 5-2B. Pole Setting 5-2C. Pole Framing 5-2D. Stays 5-3E. Stay Insulators 5-3F. Field Modifications 5-3
3. CONDUCTOR 5-4A. Materials 5-4B. Sagging 5-4C. Sag Charts 5-4D. Stringing 5-5E. Damaged Conductor 5-5F. Sag Error 5-5G. Conductor Attachment 5-6H. Line Splices for Tensioning and Looping 5-6I. Connectors 5-6
4. CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES 5-7A. Pre-formed Ties and Grips 5-7B. Pin Insulator Ties 5-7C. Preformed ties for stay wire 5-7D. Application 5-7E. Compression Fittings 5-7F. PG Clamps 5-8
5. LINE CONSTRUCTION 5-9A. Arrangement of Conductor 5-9B. Attachment to Poles 5-9C. Conductor Ties 5-9D. Conductor Support 5-9E. Pole Wiring 5-9
6. INSTALLATION OF STAYS 5-107. TRANSFORMER STRUCTURES 5-118. ABC CABLE FOR 0.4kV OVERHEAD LINE 5-129. INSTALLATION CRITERIA 5-17
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 1.0
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. General
The general instructions included in this section shall be applied to all 11 kV and 400/230volt overhead line construction under this Project. Additional general instructions areincluded in each section as they are applied specifically to the subject covered in thatsection.
These construction standards provide basic requirements for new facilities.
The clearances of conductors and structures shall be as per the construction standarddrawing no.CSG-01 and CSG-02.
Deviations from these standards may become necessary due to unique or specialconditions. In such cases, the directions of the Employer shall be followed.
The safety rules of the NEA shall be strictly observed at all times by the Contractors' andNEA's work forces.
B. Pole numbering
Poles and structures shall be numbered in accordance with a numbering system providedby NEA. Each pole or structure shall be paint stenciled with the assigned number.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 2.0
POLES. CROSSARMS, AND STAYSA. Poles
Poles shall be installed by length and class at locations in accordance "with theconstruction plan.
B. Pole setting
Pole holes shall be dug large enough in diameter to admit a tamping bar all around theperiphery of the pole and shall have a uniform dimension as per the type of pole used atthe top and bottom. Poles shall be planted in the ground to the depth specified in CSG-05(b). Before planting a pole, the bottom of the hole made for planting the pole, shall becleaned of free soil and firmly tamped, to prevent the hole from settling.
The stability of a pole, particularly a pole without stay, is greatly influenced by the size ofthe pole hole, the nature of the soil and the care exercised in back filling and tamping.Two active hand tampers and one slow shoveler shall result in good compaction.
Poles shall be set to stand perpendicular except at terminals, angles and other points ofexcessive strain where they shall be given a rake not to exceed 10 centimetres against thedirection of strain. Poles located at the sides of banks or other locations, where washoutsmay occur, shall be protected by suitable cribbing, or shall be referred to the Engineer forrecommended action.
After the pole is in position and the hole is back filled and tamped, soil shall be piled andpacked firmly around the pole. Pole setting shall be inspected prior to acceptance and anyback fills that have sunk shall be refilled.
Poles located in shallow river beds shall be protected by gabions as designated by theEmployer. Gabions should be approximately 2 metres × 1 metre × metre. Four suchgabions are required for each pole.
Set pole and pour 860 mm diameter foundation as per construction standard CSG-05(a).Level areas around pole and set gabions in pattern shown in CSG-06. It is important tolace adjacent gabions together along the perimeter of all contact surfaces. Fill gabionswith hard, durable, clean stone, 100 mm to 200 mm in size in three layers. Install twoconnecting wires at each layer. Lace gabion lids securely and make certain that all edgesare closed. Fill void between pole and gabion with hard, durable, clean rock 200 mmminimum size.
C. Pole Framing
Pole and structures shall generally be framed in accordance with these standards and theconstruction structure data sheets. Where special framing requirements are necessary, theEmployer shall provide framing instructions for the specific structure.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Each cross-arm shall be attached to the pole by a pole clamp or by machined bolts ofsufficient length to pass completely through the holes provided on the pole and cross-arms and receive their full complement of nuts.
Bolts of proper length shall be used. Excess nuts shall not be used to make use of a boltwhich would otherwise be too long. The end of a machined bolt projecting more than 3centimetres beyond the nut shall be cut off to a length of 2 centimetres beyond the nut.Each bolt, when installed, shall have its full complement of nuts.
D. Stays
Stay leads specified in construction documents are defined as the horizontal distance fromthe centre line of the pole at ground line to the point where the anchor rod should enterthe ground assuming the ground to be level. For the correction in stay leads for unevenground see Drawing No. CSG-11.
The Engineer, upon request, may designate the actual location of stay anchor rods onslope of hills. The stay stake indicates the point where the anchor rod enters the ground.The anchor hole shall be dug accordingly.
The attachment of one stay shall not overlap that of another stay when two or more staysare carried to a pole or anchor. Each shall be entirely independent of the other. This doesnot prevent the use of multiple eye rods for nuts designed for such use.
All stays to be installed on a pole line shall be placed and drawn reasonably tight beforethe conductors are tensioned. After the conductors are tensioned and sagged to their finalposition, the stays shall be carefully inspected to see that each is carrying its share of theload on the pole as intended. If multiple stays are not carrying equal strain, the slack stayshall be pulled up until it is sharing load as intended.
Stay anchors must be installed full depth and set to pull against undisturbed soil todevelop full tension. An anchor not properly installed will move and allow movement ofthe top of the pole, thus slacking the conductors. Stay anchors installed in soft or unstableearth shall be placed at specified depth and back filled with 5 cm. maximum size crushedstone placed to a depth of 1 meter from the bottom of the pole.
E. Stay Insulators
Stay insulators shall be installed on all stays in accordance with the constructiondrawings.
F. Field Modifications
During the erection work at the field there may be necessity to modify galvanized steelhardware and may have to be drilled, reamed, filed or cut. Under such a condition thearea of the steel exposed, after these modifications, shall be coated with a zinc-rich paintto protect the steel from corrosion.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 3.0
CONDUCTOR
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSA. Materials
XLPE covered conductors refer to an assembly of strands of hard drawn aluminium alloyfor greater strength which are termed as All Aluminium Alloy Conductor (AAAC).
B. Sagging
Conductors shall be sagged in accordance with the sag chart specified by thesespecifications.
The importance of careful sagging of conductors cannot be over emphasised. Conductorshave definite characteristic that control their behaviour resulting from changes oftemperature, wind speed and additional load due to ice or wet snow.
Conductors must not be sagged too tightly (less than specified sag) as unspecified extratensions may result in failure of conductor structure.
Conductors sagged too loosely (more than specified sag) may contact adjacent conductorshardware or any structure. Excess sag can reduce clearance beneath the line with theground to the point of danger.
C. Sag Charts
Unless otherwise noted, all sag charts are calculated on the basis of 35 kg/sqm windpressure
Sag is always measured vertically, without wind, when conductors are being installed orre-sagged.
Unless otherwise specified by the Employer for a specific condition, initial or stringingsag shall be applied to the installation of all new unstressed conductor. The initial sag isalways less than the final sag.
Sags for the various temperatures shall be furnished by the Engineer in a table form forspans not covered by the sag chart.
In order to ascertain the sag for a given stringing temperature, select the pointcorresponding to the proper temperature on the scale on the left-hand side of the sagchart. Lay a straight edge so that it passes through this point and the point of the centrescale representing the length of span to be sagged. The straight edge will then indicate theproper stringing sag on the right-hand scale. Interpolate if the temperature of span is notexactly the same as designated on the chart. The low voltage neutral conductor shall besagged with the same sag as the low voltage phase conductor. If the low voltageconductor, as a group, has less design sag than the high voltage phase conductor installed
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
above it, the low voltage conductor, as a group, shall be installed to the same sag as thehigh voltage conductors installed above.
D. Stringing
The dynamometers and similar apparatus shall be used for tensioning of conductor toobtain appropriate sagging of conductors.
For stringing of XLPE Covered (AAAC) Conductors of all sizes, stringing rollers orroller shall be used to support the conductor as it is pulled out and sagged. Stringingrollers shall be used regardless of size of aluminium conductors, bare or covered.
Stringing rollers shall be* suspended at each insulator support position so that theconductor shall roll smoothly over the roller protecting conductor from any physicaldamage.
Stringing sheaves shall have a diameter at least 20 times the conductor diameter and sofinished as to prevent damage of any kind to the conductor as it is pulled through thesheaves.
Conductor drum shall be located at a sufficient distance from the first structure to avoidexcessive bending of the conductor over the sheaves and excessive downward loading onthe cross-arms.
Attention shall be paid to the fact that all sag charts contained herein for AAACconductors are calculated on the basis of non pre-stressed conductor. For this reason, atno time during the stringing or sagging operation, shall conductors of this type be pulledto sags which are less than those shown by the charts.
Special care shall be taken at all times to prevent the conductor from becoming kinked,twisted or abraded in any manner. Where it is necessary to drag conductors on theground, the conductors shall be protected by covering all stones or other objects whichmight damage the conductor with boughs or trees or suitable pieces of lumber. Theserequirements are especially important when AAAC conductor is being handled on rivercrossing spans. Floats with rollers shall be used to prevent the conductor from draggingalong the river bottom.
In stringing conductors across highways, the conductors shall be fully protected frompassing vehicles by use of temporary guard structures.
E. Damaged Conductor
Damaged conductors shall be repaired by using a repair sleeve provided that no more than2 strands of the outer aluminium layer are damaged and further provided that none of thesleeve core strands are damaged. For a conductor damaged in excess of the aboveconditions, the damaged section of the conductor shall be cut out and a tension spliceinstalled.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
When cutting out damaged section of conductor, no more than 1 tension splice shall bepermitted in a span and no splice be made within 8 meters of an insulator attachment.
F. Sag Error
Sag error shall not exceed + 40 mm from the sag defined by the sag chart.
G. Conductor Attachment
Conductors shall be secured to pin insulators with pre-formed conductor ties or with tiewire. Insulator ties, except at jumper supports in structures, shall be made with pre-formed ties when available.
Conductors shall be connected to dead end assemblies with tension set.
H. Line Splices For Tensioning And Looping
Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make conductor splices so that itshall remain free from trouble. Great care shall be taken to completely clean the strands ofaluminum conductor. The splicing sleeve must be centered over the conductor endsbefore compressing to make a splice of required strength.
Sleeve listed in material list shall be used when splicing AAAC conductors prior toinstallation. The outer strands of aluminum shall be carefully cleaned with a wire brush toremove all foreign matter till the aluminum shines brightly. The cleaning applies to bothnew and old conductors. Splicing sleeves for aluminum conductor are supplied by themanufacturer pre-filled with inhibitor compound.
Splices in line conductors shall be so located that the end of the splicing sleeve is at least30 cm from the end of a suspension or dead end clamp. Non-tension loops, such asbetween dead ends, shall be spliced with a connector when the conductor are of samemetal and size.
I. Connectors
1. Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make electricalconnections that will be free from trouble.
2. Tap connectors are supplied by manufacturers pre-filled with inhibitor compound.Excess inhibitor compound shall not to be removed but it shall be wiped over theconnector as a moisture seal. Connectors shall not be covered or taped.
3. Compression connectors shall be located in such a manner that there shall be atleast 30 cm of conductor between the end of the connector and the end of a deadend
4. Connectors shall be installed on non-tensioned portion of the conductor such asloops in preference to the conductor in the span.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
5. Connectors installed on conductor shall be located in a span adjacent to thecrossing rather than the crossing span when practicable.
6. Aluminum compression connectors, pre-filled with inhibitor compound, shall becompressed on the cleaned area of aluminum conductor. Where necessary,inhibitor compound shall be applied to the cleaned conductor and connectorbefore assembly.
7. Aluminums compression connectors shall be used for connecting aluminum toaluminum conductors.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 4.0
CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES
GENERAL INSTRUCTION
A. Pre-Formed Ties And Grips
Taps for jumpers and services shall not be made over the legs of ties or dead end grips.
B. Pin Insulator Ties
Pin insulator ties are of 2 types:
a. With single top grooves: Single top ties may be used to turn line angles to 7degrees where single insulators are permitted. Please refer material list CSG-26,27 for specific applications.
b. With side grooves with specific size of ties for specific conductor in each tiestyle: Specific usage is dictated by insulator pin loading and use of singleinsulators as specified in material list CSG 26, 27.
C. Preformed ties for Stay Wire
c. Preformed ties for stay wire are furnished as per material list CSG 26, 27.
Preformed ties for stay wire are right hand lay. Preformed ties for stay wire may beremoved and replaced up to 3 times, when initially installed, to permit adjustment of staytension.
D. Application
When applying ties or grips the manufacturer’s identification tag and colour coding shallbe checked to insure that the tie or grip is the right unit specified for application on thespecific conductor or wire strand.
Preformed ties for stay wire are furnished with two crossover markings. When applyingpreformed ties on hardware, the grip shall be installed using the crossover point closest tothe loop of the grip.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-10
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 5.0
LINE CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL INSTRUCTION
A. Arrangement of Conductor
The standard position of 11 kV phase conductors on the cross-arm in the normaltriangular configuration looking from the normal source of power supply shall be seen as:
Red (R) on top of the pole, Yellow (Y) on right hand end of the cross-arm and Blue (B)on left hand end of the cross arm.
B. Attachments to Poles
Bolt holes are provided on poles for cross-arms, cross-arm braces and stay bolts.
C. Conductor Ties
Pre-formed ties and grips shall be used for attaching conductors to structures whenavailable.
If pre-formed materials are not available, the wire shall be soft conductor so that whenmade up, the tie wire will bind the conductor tightly. No tie wire shall be used for asecond time.
Jumpers on structures shall always be made with tie wire as per Drawing No. CSG-29
Tie wire shall be of the same metal as that of the bare conductor to which the tie isapplied.
D. Conductor Support
The conductor supports on straight lines shall be carried on the top wire groove of the pininsulator. Conductors shall be attached to the side conductor groove of pin insulator onthe outside of angles so that transverse conductor tension will tend to hold the conductorin the insulator groove.
Conductor ties shall not hold a conductor on the insulator when uplift exists. If uplift isfound, it is required to consult with the Employer to determine remedial action to betaken.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-11
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
E. Pole Wiring
All taps or connections passing from one level to another on the pole shall, as far aspossible, be vertical. Connections shall have sufficient length so that the line conductorsare not moved from normal positions and normal movement is not restricted. Connectionsshall have at least 30 centimetres clearance from other conductors. Any connectioncarried from one side of the pole to the other side shall be supported on pin insulators.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-12
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 6.0
INSTALLATION OF STAYS
GENERAL NOTES
1. Where stays are installed on a line angle structure, line of stay shall bisect theoutside line angle.
2. The span of stay extending between poles shall not be greater than 50 meter.
3. Anchor and anchor rods shall be set so that the axis of the rod and line of stayshall be straight. The portion of the anchor rod above the ground shall not be bentat an angle to connect a stay wire. If this occurs, anchor and anchor rod shall bereset. The anchor rod shall not be exposed for more than 15 centimetres above theground after the anchor is set.
4. If gravel back fill is required to set anchor in soft or unstable soil, as per DrawingNo. CSG-07, gravel back fill shall be designated as "Local Material".
5. If a stay is installed on a pole where low volt conductor is dead ended or doubledead ended and extends past stay, a piece of plastic hose slit along the length shallbe placed over the stay wire extending from the upper stay attachment to 200 mmbelow lowest low voltage conductor. After installation, the hose shall be wrappedwith plastic tape and the hose shall be secured to the upper stay bolt with tie wire.Plastic hose shall be "Local Material".
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-13
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 7.0
TRANSFORMER STRUCTURES
General
1. Distribution panel-board material and equipment ratings shall be determined bythe kVA rating of the transformer and number of 400/230 volt outgoingdistribution circuits. Please see Drawing No.CSLV-6, CSLV-7 and associatedmaterial list for associated equipment ratings and quantities.
2. Where outgoing distribution circuits are installed, pole moment loading must bebalanced by another outgoing distribution circuits in the opposite direction or byinstallation of stays.
3. Two separate rods shall be used to earth the transformer structurea. One for surge arresters and equipmentb. Another for the neutral of transformer low voltage winding.
Each earth rod shall be driven at a minimum distance of 2 metres from theadjacent pole resulting in a minimum distance of 6 meters between the two groundrods.
4. Ground conductor lead shall be stranded steel wire, which shall run inside 2.5mlong 1/2" diameter GI pipe.
5. 1/2" banding material shall be used to strap grounding conductors and or theprotective GI pipe mentioned in 4 above to pole(s) at one (1) meter intervals.
6. Compression connectors and PG clamp shall be used to make all electricalconnections.
7. Conductor shall be terminated on main breaker and neutral bus with cablesocket/cable lugs of proper size. If a sufficient number of connectors/cable lugsare not provided with the main breaker, the Contractor shall provide the remainingnumber required as local material.
8. Distribution Panel Board installation includes MCCB fitting and necessaryconnections with transformers and outgoing feeders
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-14
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 8.0
ABC CABLE FOR 0.4 kV OVERHEAD LINE
A. GENERAL
1. The Aerial Self Supporting Bundle Conductor consists of four XLPE insulatedcores (3 phases and one neutral) of hard- drawn stranded aluminium conductorswhich are laid up together. The 4 conductors of the bundle will sustain themechanical loads.
2. Special care should be taken when handling the cable drums, and the unwinding,pulling, stringing and clamping the cables.
3. Precautions should be taken to prevent the bundle from dragging over the ground,ensure adequate protection when crossing fences or any other obstacles to avoiddamage to the cable insulation.
B. POLE PREPARATION
1. Hardware can be fitted to poles before or after the poles are set up.
2. Hardware can be fixed to poles by means of:
3. Pigtail hot dipped galvanised bolts, nuts and washersorhook hot dipped galvanised bolts, nuts and washers
I. PROCEDURE FOR SETTING UP THE LINE
1. Before setting up the lines, necessary precautions must be taken such asthe suitable staying of line poles to avoid the overstraining of the supportsand hardware, which are not designed to resist to dead end line stresses.
2. Suspension fittings should be used where the line angle is less than 60°.When the line angle exceeds this value double strain assemblies must beused.
3. Hardware should be fitted to either side of the poles to accommodateangles in the line. In the event of an accident this will allow the cable toswing free and avoid damage.
4. When ABC lines are installed on a hill a double dead end assembly isrecommended instead of a suspension bracket on the peak of the hill, asthe weight of the ABC will load the bracket excessively. On a gradient thecable is pulled from the higher to the lower point.
5. Following the line adjustment, the strained bundles sections will be kept
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-15
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
on stringing blocks during a minimum period of 24 hours before clampingthe line and angle suspensions.
C. RUNNING OUT PREPARATION
I. CABLE LAYING
1. The drum is positioned 8-10 m behind the support, used for final adjustment. It isslightly set off (lm) from the pole on the side of the first stringing block, toprevent any friction of the twisted cable against the pole.
2. In the case of strong gradient the drum is positioned at the higher point (extremity)on a drum carrier equipped with mechanical breaking device to regulate therunning out the cable.
3. The cable drum (drum carrier) should be positioned to allow the cable to roll offthe top of the cable drum and 8-10 metres from the first pole, (such distance isequal to the length of the pole over the ground)
4. The cable must not drag on the ground during laying operations.
5. The rotation of the cable drum will be controlled by the operator and if necessarybe regulated with a breaking system.
6. Passing the conductors through the stringing blocks and pulling the bundle with apulling grip performs the pulling
7. Stringing blocks (wide grooved pulley) shall be hung on poles, by means of anylon or rope sling in chocker fashion or a special device developed for suchapplication consisting or a pulley and a saddle which includes a bracket and alashing device.
8. The pulled extremities must be tied with cable ties to avoid untwisting of thebundle. Pulleys are fitted on supports, just below the pigtail/hook bolts in such amanner that the bundle is near the level of the suspension clamp. This ensures:
easy placement of the bundle in the suspension clamps. minimum untensioning during the installation of the strain clamps.
9. Stringing blocks or pulleys must not be suspended from the pigtail/hook bolts.These are not designed to support the loads exerted during the pulling.
10. The pulling of the bundle should be by mechanical means. However, it can bedone manually in the case of line section not exceeding 100 metres withmaximum spans of 50 metres.
11. Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the cable insulation.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-16
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
II. LINK BETWEEN THE PULLING ROPE AND THE BUNDLE
1. A pulling rope is threaded through all the pulleys on the route. This rope shouldbe: 10mm Polyester rope, for a manual pulling l2mm Polyamide rope, in case of mechanical pulling
2. Attach the pulling rope to the ABC by means of a ball bearing swivel and pullingsocks set.This set includes:
a galvanised steel sock fixed in permanence to the rope a galvanised steel sock is slipped over the bundle, selected according to
bundle diameter a swivel is fitted between the two galvanised steel socks.
3. Prepare adequate protection where cables cross fences of any other structures onroute
4. The foreman verifies that the rope slide normally and that ABC does not sufferany damage by sharp objects.
5. The people in charge of the drum carrier regulate the breaking according to thesag chart instructions given to him.
6. The pulling action should be slow and continuous avoiding unnecessary jerking.
III. REALISATION OF THE FIRST TERMINAL POLE
1. No lineman has to remain on poles.
2. At the last pole of the run, the bundle is clamped with a come-along and tension isprovided by a cable/chain hoist linked to the pole by nylon or rope sling.
3. The recommended tension is obtained by a dynamometer and sagging ofconductors shall be made according to the sag chart.
4. When the required tension/sag has been reached, locate with an adhesive tapewhere the strain clamp shall be positioned and then proceed to fit the strain clampon the bundle. Exert an extra load on the bundle in order to facilitate theinstallation of the strain clamp to the pigtail/ hook bolt.
5. Fit a cable tie in front and behind the clamp to keep all conductors together.
6. Release the apparatus and remove the stringing block.
7. The dead end assembly consists of: One pigtail or hook bolt One dead end clamp for self supporting bundle Two cable ties made of polyamide for clamping bundled conductors
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-17
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
IV. REALISATION OF THE FIRST LINE SECTION
1. The tensioning of the first line section shall be made at the first double strainpoint. For such procedure a chain or cable hoist equipped with a reel is needed.
2. The loads being more or less equilibrated, no staying is required.
3. The line adjustment for the fixing of the dead end clamp on bundle is obtained asfollows:
3.1 Proceed simultaneously on the two tensioning devices (one at the termination poleand the other at the double strain assembly) in order to obtain the adjustment ofthe first line section and the slack bridge needed for the double strain assembly.
3.2 Install the strain clamps by exerting a supplementary traction in order to facilitatethe fixing of the clamps on the bolts.
3.3 Release the loading device at the double strain point.
3.4 Remove the equipment (Cable hoist Pulley)
3.5 The others line section are realised in the same manner
3.6 The last line section is realised as the first terminal pole
V. INTERMEDIATE POLES
1. Lift the cable from the pulley and fit the bundle into the suspension clamp.
2. Close the suspension clamp and fit a cable tie on the ABC either side of thesuspension clamp
3. The suspension assembly consists of: One pigtail or hook bolt One suspension clamp for self supporting bundle Two cable ties
VI. CABLE JOINTS
1. Using pre-insulated ferrules should join the cables.
2. Lay two cables to be joined in juxtaposition in order to stagger the joints andprepare to joint phase to phase etc.
3. Strip the insulation according to the length (strip length) indicated on theferrules. Take particular care not to damage the aluminium stands.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-18
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
4. Pass the conductor through the seal at the end of the ferrule and onto the centerbarrier. The seal should be securely seated on the insulation of the conductor.
5. Crimp the ferrule with standard compression die indicated on the ferrule,starting at the center and progressing to the outside. Pre-insulated ferrules arealso used for repairing accidental damage to conductors.
VII. LINESMEN TOOLS
1. Necessary tools required for ABC Cable stringing: unwinding machine or similar equipment provided with drum breaking
system
a ground hoist or winch, strong enough to give an efficient suppleness.
traction rope having a length and a mechanical resistance sufficient to allowpulling and stringing operations up to ten spans of ABC
stringing blocks (one per support) 10 spans -11 supports
hydraulic compression tool (performance motorized since faster more easyto use in remote areas)
Pulling grip for ABC Cables
Pulling grips for bundle
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-19
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Clause 9.0
INSTALLATION CRITERIA
GENERAL INSTRUCTION
1. The line alignment should be as straight as possible to minimize requirements forstays.
2. The basic span shall be maintained within the following limits:-a) For 11 kV - 50 m to 85 mb) For 0.4 and 0.23 kV-40 m to 55 m
3. The entire construction works shall be performed as per the construction unitsspecified. Whenever the construction unit does not cover any specific activity,the Contractor and the GSEEP shall mutually settle the cost as per the man-hourinvolvement for the same and according to the labour rate quoted by theContractor in his Bid.
4. Detailed schedules of material to be used are provided in each structure drawingof the construction standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor tojudge the appropriateness of the listed material according to the site conditions. Ifthere is any need for addition/reduction or deviation from the listed materialsize/quantity, the Contractor shall ask the GSEEP for the approval of the same.
5. All types of line clearances shall be maintained as per the construction standardsprovided to the Contractor. Deviations from the standards may be allowed onlyfor unique or special conditions.
6. Safety rules of the NEA shall be strictly observed at all times by the GSEEP andthe Contractor and their personnel. Special care shall be taken to maintain theoptimum conductor sag to provide adequate safety to the construction and theproperty or people.
7. All fastenings (e.g. preformed ties, nut bolts, stays etc.) shall be so installed thatthe constructed line components shall not fail to remain within the safety marginwhile maximum working load is applied.
8. If the Contractor requires clarification of any construction standard or unit or hefeels any doubt in his interpretation of construction activities he should clarifythe points with the GSEEP in writing and the decision thus made shall be valid forfurther work.
9. HV Insulators: The Contractor shall use HV pin insulators in the alignment of theline where the break angle does not exceed the limits provided hereafter.
Chapter 5. Construction Standards 5-20
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. Conductor Size in sq. mm. Minimum Break Angle in Degrees
1 100 sqmm AAAC 72 55 sqmm AAAC 15.5
In the case where the break angle exceeds the above values the Contractor shallmake dead-end at the angle structure and use disc insulator fittings.
10. Stays:- The Contractor, in general case, shall install at least one stay for thesupports in the following cases:
1. Dead end structure2. Tee-off (Tap) structure3. Stay may not be installed in the following conditions
A. HV line (11 and 33 kV) with 10m and 11 m Steel Tubular Polea) - Conductor 3x100 sq. mm and 3x55 sq. mm
Span 75 m (max)Break angle <=4deg.
b) - Conductor 3x50 sq. mmSpan 75 m(max)Break angle <=5.5deg.
B. Composite (HV-LV) line with 10m and 8 m Steel Tubular Polec) - Conductor 3x100 sq. mm HV: 3x100 sq. mm +1x55 sq. mm LV
Span 40 m(max)Break angle <=2 deg.
d) - Conductor 3x55 sq. mm HV; 3x50 sq.mm+lx30sq. mm LVSpan 50 m (max)Break angle <=2.5 deg.
For conditions different from the above, the Contractor shall provide calculationsshowing the number of stays necessary and get approval from GSEEP prior toinstallation.
11. Transformer mounting:- Each transformer (except single phase pole mounted)shall be so mounted on the plate-form that the centre of the transformer is in themiddle of the plate-form. Deviations are not permitted from this rule.
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CHAPTER 6
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOREXECUTION OF WORKS
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CHAPTER 6
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXECUTION OF WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Site Office Management .............................................................................................. 6-1
2. Contractor's key personnel and workforce ............................................................... 6-1
3. Tools and Equipment................................................................................................... 6-1
4. Approval of Drawings.................................................................................................. 6-2
5. Extra Work................................................................................................................... 6-2
6. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
7. Local Materials............................................................................................................. 6-4
8. Construction Time Schedule....................................................................................... 6-4
9. Measurement of work and material ........................................................................... 6-5
10. Workmanship and quality of work ............................................................................ 6-6
11. Commissioning of work............................................................................................... 6-7
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
1. Site Office Management
1.1 The contractor and / or sub contractors as proposed by the bidder as per GCCshall establish and maintain throughout the period of the performance of thecontract a site office to serve as a base for all the operations necessary to performthe works and shall maintain adequate store facilities for storing materials andequipment issued by the employer. In case the above-mentioned facilities andestablishments are not found satisfactory during the site verification, the employershall have right to instruct the contractor for rectification of the same.
1.2 Prior to the beginning of construction works the contractor at his own cost shallestablish a demonstration and training installation of 11/0.4 kV structures as listedin construction standards of tender document. The installation shall include atleast 3 spans of AAAC conductor and ABC cable of each size to illustrate the typeof materials used for tangent, angle and dead end construction for 11/0.4 kV line.Such structures need not be spaced more than 10 meters apart. The intent ofestablishing such arrangement shall be to provide visible examples of theapplication of the various materials to be used and to provide training and testingfacility for the contractor's line construction personnel.
2. Contractor's key personnel and workforce
2.1 The contractor shall have experienced and qualified administrative, accountingand store keeping staffs capable to undertake respective jobs. An office managerwith adequate qualification and experience to run such establishment efficientlymust head the site office. The contractor shall employ only experienced,competent and skilled office staff as required in the tender document.
2.2 The line construction and supervisory staff of the contractor shall be examined bythe employer to ensure their capability to perform proper quality of work as perEvaluation Criteria (Section 3) clause no. 2.5 before commencement of the work.
2.3 The site and field staff as approved by the employer shall be made available forthe entire construction period of the project. All the staff and workforce of thecontractor shall be issued identity cards jointly certified by the contractor and theemployer. Replacement of any such staff or site personnel must not be madewithout prior permission of the employer.
2.4 The contractor is required to pay salary and wages of his staff and workforce at aninterval not exceeding a month. The rate of wages payable to the labours shall notbe less than as prescribed by the labour law of Nepal.
3. Tools and Equipment
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
3.1 The Contractor shall have owned, leased or hired tools and equipment forsuccessful execution of the work. Prior to beginning of the work the contractorshall show these items in his possession. In case of the heavy tools equipment andvehicles the contractor is required to submit the source of these items withcredible documents such as contract papers conforming their availability at thetime of the execution of the works.
3.2 The employer shall examine to verify the availability of all such tools andequipment before commencement of the work. The contractor shall be allowed tostart his work only after verification of such tools and equipment in satisfaction ofthe employer. No tools and equipment shall be provided by employer.
The contractor shall have following tools and equipment for the execution of thecontract:
No. Equipment Type and CharacteristicsMin.NumberRequired
1 Crane Truck (Minimum 3 Ton lifting capacity) 1
2 General Purpose Truck (Minimum 10 Ton capacity) 1
3 Max or Rachet Puller suitable for HV/LV Cable
Tensioning5
4 Come along Clamp suitable for HV/LV Cable Tensioning 5
5 Meggar (5 kV) 5
6 Multimeters 5
4. Approval of Drawings
4.1 The contractor shall update and revise all plan and profile drawings provided tohim by the employer after performing check survey of each of the segment of thescheme.
4.2 The contractor must get approval from the employer in writing before he startsexecution of construction of any of the segment of work. If the contractor executesany work without the employer's prior approval, he may be asked to revise thesame without paying any compensation to him.
5. Extra Work
5.1 Extra work and goods supply shall be performed in accordance with writtendirectives as issued by the Project to the Contractor.
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
5.2 Extra work or goods supply for which there are applicable unit prices will be paidfor at such unit prices.
5.3 Where there are no applicable contract unit prices, the price to be paid by theProject to the Contractor for extra works / goods supply shall be fixed throughnegotiation between Employer and the Contractor based on:
- the GoN norms and respective district rate approved by the District RateFixation Committee in case of extra works to be performed
- the prevailing market rate of the goods, in case of extra goods to besupplied.
In no case, such price shall exceed Project’s cost estimates for the item.
5.4 Nothing in this Clause shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the extrawork as directed in writing by the Project.
5.5 Any variation in the quantities of unit price construction units, within the rangesstated in the Special Conditions of Contract, Clause 1.3, from nominal bidquantities of such unit price construction units shall not be construed as ExtraWork.
6. Materials
6.1 All the construction materials for installation of the Works shall be provided bythe Contractor.
6.2 All materials and equipment of the Project shall be located at the Project’s or suchother areas where they are being stored. During issue and handling over of thesematerials it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to load all of them and provideall necessary lifting and handling equipment, labour and suitable transport asrequired to transport the various items of materials and equipment to theContractor’s site of storage and operations.
6.3 The listing of materials shall show the limiting allowance for breakage and scrapand material unit prices, which may be applied to the contractor’s accountabilityto the Project for all materials and equipment issued by the Project. Allowancesfor such materials shall be as under:
- AAAC Conductor 0.5 %- ABC Cables 0.5 %
6.4 Accountability for all materials and equipment issued by the project shall be basedon the material lists associated with the various construction drawings containedin the Construction Standards and the allowances referenced in clause 3 above. Atthe time of final material accounting, any deficit in the Contractor’s material
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
account shall be charged to the Contractor at the unit price rates enlisted by theproject during handing over of the materials to the Contractor.
6.5 If the Contractor fails to account for all materials and equipment issued by theProject as set forth in clause 4 above, the Contractor shall be charged for themissing materials or equipment. The Project shall have the right to withholdmoney due or to become due to the Contractor, as reimbursement for the deficit inthe Contractor’s material.
6.6 Prior to the rehabilitation work, representative of the NEA’s local branch officethe Site Engineer and the contractor shall jointly inspect the materials to bedismantled and list down such materials. It shall be the contractor’s responsibilityto pack those goods appropriately, transport them to the nearest NEA store and getreceipt. Such receipts shall be enclosed with the subsequent invoices claimed bythe contractor.
7. Local Materials
7.1 Certain minor items of materials, including civil materials, required by theConstruction Standards are designated Local Materials in the Standards and shallbe furnished and installed by the Contractor as part of the completed unit ofconstruction.
7.2 The contractor shall include the cost of such items of materials in his quotedconstruction unit prices and no other payments for such materials shall be made tothe contractor.
7.3 The project, may, at it option, require the project’s approval of any or all LocalMaterials prior to procurement of such items by the Contractor.
7.4 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine his requirements for anyitems of Local Material in a timely manner and make procurement accordingly.No delays shall be allowed, and no exceptions made to the required use of LocalMaterials due to the unavailability of such materials.
8. Construction Time Schedule
8.1 Before the commencement of construction works the contractor shall be requiredto submit a detail construction time schedule showing details of each event ofconstruction of different components of works so as to complete the whole workwithin the time frame as per the requirement of the contract. The contractor'sproposal shall be examined by the employer to ensure his ability to perform thework in time and approval shall be given with any modification, if necessary, insatisfaction of the employer.
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
8.2 If the contractor fails to execute the any component of work within the periodspecified in the construction schedule, the employer shall have right to warn thecontractor to make up for such delay in time. In case the contractor fails toovercome delay in different components of the works instead of repeatedreminders by the employer, he shall be made fully responsible for any delay infinal time schedule and no consideration shall be made for any extension ofconstruction period for the whole work.
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
9. Measurement of work and material
9.1 The contractor after completion of work of any segment of work as per approveddrawing of the project shall submit detail work measurement in structure datasheet (SDS) as per the format in this section of the tender document.
9.2 Measurement of the work performed by the contractor shall be jointly checked bythe contractor and the staff deputed by the employer. In case of any discrepancy ordissatisfaction of employer staff the contractor shall be notified for makingcorrections for the same and the contractor shall have to submit his revisedmeasurement schedule.
9.3 The contractor shall be issued materials based upon the requirements to performhis work conveniently. The contractor is required to submit detail of materialsmeasurement in material data sheet (MDS) for each of the segment as per theprescribed format in this section of the tender document. The contractor shallassess quantity of each and every item of materials from the material data sheet.Small items such as binding wire, nails, binding tape etc. could be assessed on flatbasis.
9.4 While submitting running bill the contractor must submit details of quantity ofmaterials issued to him, quantity consumed as assessed from the materialmeasurement sheet and quantity in his possession. Materials issued, used and incontractor's possession must be reconciled as per the prescribed format in thissection of the tender document. The materials in possession of the contractor shallbe the opening material balance for the next running bill. The contractor shall alsosubmit copies of store vouchers showing details of materials issued to him.Statement of materials submitted shall be checked and certified by the employerbefore payment of each of the running bill.
10. Workmanship and quality of work
10.1 The contractor shall be attentive to maintain workmanship and quality of workwhile performing the work and shall obey to all the instructions of the field staffof the project time to time in this regard.
10.2 Special items such as concrete works, cable jointing works and transformerinstallation works etc. must be performed in presence of the project field staff. Incase of the concrete works the project staff shall assess quantity of cement andsteel to be used for each of the job and this must be followed for performing thejob. Sand and aggregate must be supplied as per the standard specification of thetender document. The project field staff shall check quality of such materials andthe contractor shall use the same after his approval. Curing of concrete worksmust be carried as per standard practice. The field staff shall have right to ask thecontractor to repeat concrete works in case of his failure to execute the job asabove or in his absence.
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
10.3 Each and every item of the standard data sheet (SDS) shall also be checked by theproject staff for the satisfaction of quality of workmanship as per the prescribedspecification of the tender document. In case of failure of the contractor to executeany item of the work as per proper workmanship or quality, the project shall haveright to ask the contractor to revise or remedy such work at the cost of thecontractor.
11. Commissioning of work11.1 After completion of entire work of any village or load centre, the project after
necessary tests shall arrange to electrically charge the same. In case of successfuloperation in satisfaction to the project the contractor shall be issued a provisionalcertificate starting from the date of such commissioning.
11.2 The Project shall be authorized to change such date of commissioning in case offailure of the line due to any defect in the quality of construction.
11.3 Final acceptance of work shall be issued only after completion and satisfactorycommissioning of whole work of the contract.
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
GRID SOLAR AND ENERGY EFFICIENCY PROJECT
SAMPLE DATA SHEET (SDS)
(SUBMITTED WITH R. B. No... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . )
Tender No:- Site Office:-Tender Details:- Scheme:-Name of Contractor:- Route:- SDS No:-Running Bill No:- Running Bill Date:- Current Issue Date:-
C.U. Description Unit Quantity Material Used Qty. as perCurrent Bill
1 2 3 4 5
Submitted by:- Checked by:- Approved by:-
Contractor's Signature: - Site Supervisor: - Site In charge /Engineer:-
Contractor's Seal:
Chapter 6. Special Requirements for Execution of works 6-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Nepal Electricity AuthorityGrid Solar and Energy Efficiency ProjectSample Structure Data Sheet
District : Scheme : Tender No.:VDC : Page : Tender Detail :Scheme : Sheet No.: Name of the Contractor :
SN
Line Length(m)
Pole FrameSize Wise Pole Frame Stay
Conductor (Sq.mm.) Length (km)
Transformer(kVA) Switch
Remark
HT(100
sqmmAAAC in km)
COMLT
(95sqmABCCable in km)10m 8m HT LT HT LT
HT(100
sqmmAAAC in km)
LT (95 sqmmABC Cable in
km)
HT COM LTHT60 mspan
COM50 mspan
LT40 mspan
STSA
STSA1
DTDA
HS
STDDE
TO
DE
TR-DE
TR-IN
A1 A2 B C D E S D F S D F 100 50 100 50 95 50 25 95 50 25 200 100 50 25 DS
LS
Section VI C. Forms & Procedure VI C-
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-FCONTRACT EXECUTION SCHEDULESCHEDULE -1Work Execution ScheduleThe Works shall be completed in 540 days from the date of Effective Date in the following manner.
Description of works 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Contract Agreement
Work Team mobilization
Pre-construction survey,data sheet submission and material pro
Construction works
Preparation of as built drawings & SDS
Testing and commissioning and handover
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D
CONSTRUCTION STANDARD DRAWINGS ANDMATERIAL LISTS
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-1
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-2
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-3
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-4
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-5
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-6
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 3 NOSPIN INSULATOR WITH PIN ANDNUTS/WASHER
2 1 NOSSTEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x300 ) mm.
3 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC1)
4 1 NOSSTEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
5 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC2)
6 2 NOSFLAT CROSSARM BRACE(40 X 6 X 660) mm
7 1 LOTBOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS ANDWASHERS
8 3 NOS PREFORMED WIRE (TOP TIE)
9 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDSNEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
11 kV SINGLE ARM STRUCTURE (SA)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-7
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-8
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 6 NOSPIN INSULATOR WITH PIN ANDNUTS/WASHER
2 2 NOSSTEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x300 ) mm.
3 2 NOSSTEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
4 4 NOSFLAT CROSSARM BRACE(40 X 6 X 660) mm
5 1 LOTBOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS ANDWASHERS
6 6 NOSPREFORMED WIRE (DOUBLE SIDETIES)
7 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV DOUBLE ARM STRUCTURE (DA)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-9
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-10
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 5 NOS PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND NUTS/WASHER
2 3 SET DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
3 3 NOS DEAD END CLAMPS
4 1 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x300 ) mm.
5 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC1)
6 2 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
7 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC3)
8 4 NOSFLAT CROSSARM BRACE(40 X 6 X 660) mm
9 1 LOT BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND WASHERS
10 5 NOS PREFORMED WIRE (TOP TIE)
11 3 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTORS
12 1 SET HT STAY (TYPE AS REQUIRED)
13 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV TAP OFF STRUCTURE (TO)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-11
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-12
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL1 3 NOS DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
2 3 NOS DEAD END CLAMPS
3 1 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x300 ) mm.
4 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERST)
5 1 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
6 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS(TC2)
7 2 NOSFLAT CROSSARM BRACE(40 X 6 X 660) mm
8 1 LOT BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND WASHERS
9 1 SET HT STAY (TYPE AS REQUIRED)
10 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE – 11m
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV DEAD END STRUCTURE (DE)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-13
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-14
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 3 NOS PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND NUTS/WASHER
2 6 SET DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
3 6 NOS DEAD END CLAMPS
4 2 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x300 ) mm.
5 2 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x1200 ) mm.
6 4 NOSFLAT CROSSARM BRACE(40 X 6 X 660) mm
7 1 LOT BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND WASHERS
8 3 NOS PREFORMED WIRE (TOP TIE)
9 3 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTOR
10 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV DOUBLE DEAD END STRUCTURE(DDE)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-15
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-16
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 3 NOS PIN INSULATOR WITH PIN AND NUTS/WASHER
2 1 NOS STEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL ( 50x100x1700 ) mm.
3 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS(TC1)
4 1 NOSBRACING ANGLE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE(827 X 40 X 5) mm
5 1 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS AND WASHERS(TC2)
6 4 NOSFLAT BRACE FOR OFFSET STRUCTURE(40 X 6 X 374) mm
7 1 LOT BOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS AND WASHERS
8 3 NOS PREFORMED WIRE (TOP TIE)
9 1 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV OFF SET STRUCTURE (OS)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-17
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-18
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 3 NOSPIN INSULATOR WITH PIN ANDNUTS/WASHER
2 6 SET DISC INSULATOR WITH HARDWARE
3 6 NOS DEAD END CLAMPS
4 1 NOSSTEEL CROSSARM CHANNEL( 50x100x6.4 x2390 ) mm.
5 2 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC1)
6 2 NOS BRACING ANGLE ( 40 x 40 x 5 x 2071 ) mm.
7 2 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC4)
8 2 NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC5)
9 2 NOS BRACING ANGLE ( 40 x 40 x 5 x 2723 ) mm.
10 1 LOTBOLTS WITH SUITABLE NUTS ANDWASHERS
11 3 NOS PREFORMED TIE (TOP TIE)
12 3 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTORS
13 1 SET HT STAY SET (TYPE AS REQUIRED)
14 2 NOS STEEL TUBULAR POLE - 11 M
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY11 kV H - STRUCTURE (HS)STEEL TUBULAR POLE
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-19
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-20
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-21
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-22
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
For PSC Pole
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 1 NOS SUSPENSION CLAMP
21 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
31 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTSAND WASHERS (16 X 203) MM
4 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYLV TYPE – A1 (Suspension Type)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-23
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-24
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 2 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP
22 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTSAND WASHERS (16 X 203) MM
32 for PSC0 for STP
NOS EYE NUT
42 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
5 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
6 1 SET LT STAY SET
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYLV TYPE – A2 (Suspension Typewith Angle)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-25
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-26
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 1 NOS SUSPENSION CLAMP
2 1 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP
32 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTSAND WASHERS (16 X 203) MM
41 for PSC0 for STP
NOS EYE NUT
52 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
6 5 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTOR
7 5 NOS INSULATED CABLE CAPS
8 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
9 1 SET LT STAY
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYLV TYPE - B (Suspension with an Anchor forDead)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-27
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
LV Type 'C'
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-28
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-29
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 4 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP
22 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTS ANDWASHERS (16 X 203) MM
31 for PSC0 for STP
NOS EYE NUT
42 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
5 15 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTOR
6 20 NOS INSULATED CABLE CAPS
7 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYLV TYPE - C (Four Anchor Dead End)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-30
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.NO. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 1 NOS SUSPENSION CLAMP
2 2 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP
32 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTS ANDWASHERS (16 X 203) MM
42 for PSC0 for STP
NOS EYE NUT
52 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
6 10 NOS INSULATED PIERCING CONNECTOR
7 10 NOS INSULATED CABLE CAPS
8 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYLV TYPE - D (One Suspension with twoanchor dead end)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-31
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
LV Type 'E'
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-32
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. QTY. UNIT MATERIAL
1 1 NOS ANCHOR CLAMP
21 for PSC0 for STP
NOSPIGTAIL WITH HEXAGONAL NUTS ANDWASHERS (16 X 203) MM
31 for PSC0 for STP
NOS EYE NUT
42 for STP0 for PSC
NOSPOLE CLAMP WITH NUTS, BOLTS ANDWASHERS (TC8)
5 5 NOS INSULATED CABLE CAPS
6 1 NOS POLE 9 METER
7 1 SET LT STAY
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
LV TYPE - E (Single Anchor Dead End)
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-33
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
A , mm
200Pig Tail A2
300Pig Tail A1
Particular
120 80
150
B , mm
150
C , mm
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-34
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-35
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
1000 to 1500Crib braces
ground is softFor use where
30
between undisturbed earth and pole.Large places of rock tamped tight
X
X - X
Direction Of STRAIN
450
X
CONCRETE FUNDATIONS.CRIBBING FOR POLES WITHOUTNOTE
Y - Y
is soild or compact.For use where ground
YY
450
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-36
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-37
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-38
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-39
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-40
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
SN PROPOSEDELECTRIC SYMBOLS EXISTING
2 Fuse Cutout
Transformer1
Substation6
5
4
Auto Reclosure
Load Break Switch
9
8
7
Pole P.S.C. with Stay
Pole Telescopic with Stay
Lighting Arrester
Tapping Point10
Disconnecting Switch3
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-41
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-42
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-43
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. MATERIAL (HT-STAY) QTY. UNIT MATERIAL (LT-STAY) QTY
1 HT STAY SET (600 x 600 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1 NOSLT STAY SET (300 X 300 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1
2 HT TURN BUCKLE 1 NOS LT TURN BUCKLE 1
3 HT THIMBLES 1 NOS LT THIMBLES 1
4 POLE CLAMP(TC6) 1 NOS POLE CLAMP(TC8) 0
5 HT STAY INSULATOR 1 NOS STAY INSULATOR 1
6 PREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/8 SWG
4 NOSPREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/12 SWG
4
7 7/8" SWG STAY WIRE 12 M 7/12" SWG STAY WIRE 10
8 HT EYE BOLT 0 NOS LT EYE BOLT 0
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYHT AND LT - SINGLE STAY
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-44
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-45
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. MATERIAL (HT-STAY) QTY. UNIT MATERIAL (LT-STAY) QTY
1 HT STAY SET (600 x 600 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1 NOSLT STAY SET (300 X 300 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1
2 HT TURN BUCKLE 2 NOS LT TURN BUCKLE 2
3 HT THIMBLES 2 NOS LT THIMBLES 2
4 POLE CLAMP(TC6) 2 NOS POLE CLAMP(TC8) 1
5 HT STAY INSULATOR 2 NOS STAY INSULATOR 2
6 PREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/8 SWG
8 NOSPREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/12 SWG
8
7 7/8" SWG STAY WIRE 24 M 7/12" SWG STAY WIRE 20
8 HT EYE BOLT 0 NOS LT EYE BOLT 0
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYHT AND LT – DOUBLE STAY
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-46
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-47
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-48
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
S.No. MATERIAL (HT-STAY) QTY. UNIT MATERIAL (LT-STAY) QTY
1 HT STAY SET (600 x 600 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1 NOSLT STAY SET (300 X 300 MMPLATE AND ROD)
1
2 HT TURN BUCKLE 2 NOS LT TURN BUCKLE 2
3 HT THIMBLES 1 NOS LT THIMBLES 1
4 POLE CLAMP(TC6) 1 NOS POLE CLAMP(TC8) 1
5 POLE CLAMP(TC8) 1 NOS
6 HT STAY INSULATOR 2 NOS STAY INSULATOR 2
7 PREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/8 SWG
8 NOSPREFORM TIE FOR STAYWIRE 7/12 SWG
8
8 7/8" SWG STAY WIRE 25 M 7/12" SWG STAY WIRE 20
9 HT EYE BOLT 0 NOS LT EYE BOLT 0
10 POLE 11M 1 NOS POLE 9M 1
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYHT AND LT – FLYING STAY
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-49
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-50
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-51
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-52
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-53
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-54
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-55
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-56
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-57
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-58
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
CSG-28CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
ABC-SAG CHART 95 SQ MM
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITYDISTRIBUTION SYSTEMREHABILITATION PROJECT
Sag template for 50m span(ABC 95mm^2 Conductor)
-0.450-0.400-0.350-0.300-0.250-0.200-0.150-0.100-0.0500.000
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Min Temp Erection Max Temp
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-59
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-60
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-61
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELETRICITY AUTHORITY
Semicircular Clamp for Tubular pole
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
< D >
< F >
< C >
Dia. 18
50
< E >
( B )
< A >
< H >
185
235
285
222195
173
197
mm
mm
mm
mm
TC5
TC4
TC7
TC3
297
247
234207
347
397
334307
mm
mm
Unit
TC2
TC1
Type
185
297
285
A B C18
18
18
18
1818
H
191 62550
291
241
228201
2550
50 25
5050
2525
6
6
66
179
D
2550
E F6G
(Rad. C/2)
Drawn by
mm
in
All Dimension
Approved by
Checked by
DWG. 1H
( G )
Remarks
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-62
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELETRICITY AUTHORITY
Checked by
Drawn by
252525
RemarksG
666
666
F
2525
25
12
10
10
24
20
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Rectangular Clamp for PSC pole
DWG. 2H
All Dimension
in
mm
A
TypePC1PC2PC3PC4PC5PC6
BA
295 195
306262
206
162
316 216
354 254
402 302
Unitmmmm
mmmmmmmm
E
(G)
5050
50505050
ED
150150204150150150
C
F
C183194
150
204242290
B
Approved by
D
F
Dia 18
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-63
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Semicircular Stay Clam p for Tubular Pole
N EPA L ELECTRICITY A UTHORITY
N ote :- D imensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
D W G. 3H
D rawn by
m m
in
A ll D imension
Approved by
Checked by
< D >
< B >
< A >
TC8 m m 155 257 50
Type
D ia. 18
TC6 m m
U nit
200
A
302
B
50
C
223
268
D Rem arks
6
( C )6
D ia. A
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-64
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Placement of Semicircular Stay Clamp for Tubular pole Checked by
Approved by
Drawn by
62
66
4839
50
All Dimension
in
mm
Clamp for Stay TC8
Placement of Clamp at Min. Diameter
Placement of Clamp at Normal Diameter
Placement of Clamp at M ax. Diameter
Placement of Clamp at Normal Diametre
Placement of Clamp at Max. Diametre
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
DW G. 4H
Clamp for Stay TC6
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-65
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Off Set Cross Arm Assembly for 11 kV
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Front View
Top View
( 374 x 40 x 6 mm )
254202
Rad. 9
150
744
750750150
Dia. 22
1700
30182
154
272
190
Dia. 18
877
826Dia . 18
30
Bracing Angle For 11kV Off Set
Off Set Cross Arm for 11 kV (100 x 50 x 6.4 x 1700 mm )
( 877 x 40 x 40 x 5 mm )
Flat Brace for 11kV Off Set
Clamps PC (TC) 1,2 Each ONE for this structure.
Drawn by
mm
in
All Dimension
Approved by
Checked by
DWG. 5H
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-66
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Strap for Pin Insulator string ( 11 kV )
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Strap for 11 kV Pin Insulator String ( 396 x 50 x 6 mm).
Strap for 33 kV Pin Insulator String.(404 x 50 x 6 mm)
Top View
Top View
Front View
Front View
6
348
273
160
50
Dia . 22
Rad. 8
Rad. 8160
273
344
Dia. 26
6
51
13
N/B 13 X 51 mm
N/B 13 X 51 mm
51
13
DWG. 6H
Drawn by
Approved by
Checked by
50
mm
in
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
396
404
All Dimension
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-67
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Cross Arm Brace for 11 kV.
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Top View
Top View
40
40
All Dimension
mm
in
DWG. 7H
Drawn by
Approved by
Checked by
28
760
665
36
6
28
Dia. 18
660
Cross Arm Brace for 11 kV ( 660 x 40 x 6 mm )
566
Dia. 18
36
6
Cross Arm Brace for 33 kV ( 760 x 40 x 6 mm )
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-68
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Cross Arms for 11 kV.
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Top View
Top View
Rad. 9
Dia. 22
Rad. 9
DWG. 8H
All Dimension
mm
in
Drawn by
Approved by
Checked by
Cross Arm for 33 kV ( 300 x100 x 50 x 7.5 mm )
50
100
300
250
202
254
Dia. 26
254
202
250
300
100
50
Cross Arm for 11 kV ( 300 x 100 x 50 x 6.4 mm )
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-69
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Cross Arms for 11 kV.
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
100
50
100
50
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Top View
Top View
DWG. 9H
Checked by
Approved by
Drawn by
in
mm
All Dimension
294
940
Cross Arm for 33 kV ( 1900 x 100 x 50 x 7.5 mm )
182
238
Dia. 16Rad. 9
Dia. 26
Dia. 16
272
Dia. 18Rad. 9
182Dia. 16
Dia. 22
1020
1100
1200
Cross Arm for 11 kV ( 1200 x 100 x 50 x 6.4 mm )
800
Dia. 16
1900
1680
1800
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-70
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Cross Arms for 11 kV H - Pole Structure.
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Top View
Top View
Cross Arm for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2390 x 100 x 50 x 6.4 mm )
Dia. 16
Dia. 18
Rad. 9
Dia. 26
50
100
2000
17901860214022103300
50
3100
32003300
Cross Arm for 33 kV H-Pole (3300 x 100 x 50 x 7.5 mm )
All Dimension
mm
in
Drawn by
Approved by
Checked by
DWG. 10H
50Dia. 18
Rad.9
100
Dia. 16Dia. 22
1675
2390
1815
1885
1465
1535
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-71
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Dia. 18
Rad. 9
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
Front View
Front View
Rad. 30Rad. 30
Dia. 18
1180
1220
Bracing Angle for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2719 x 40 x 40 x 5 mm )
Bracing Angle for 11 kV H-Pole ( 2071 x 40 x 40 x 5 mm )
11 kV Angle Bracing for H - Pole Structure.
DWG. 11H
All Dimension
mm
in
Drawn by
Approved by
Checked by
1315
1391
1675
1959
2035
2071
2683
2719
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-72
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Front View
11 kV Angle Bracing Assembly for H - Pole Structure. Checked by
Approved by
Drawn by
in
mm
All Dimension
DWG. 12H
11 kV H- Pole Cross Bracing
27
2683
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-73
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
Drawn by
Note :- Dimensions are subject to approval prior to manufacture.
Cross Arm For LA and DO 100 x 50 x 6.4 x 2348 mm
800
Rad. 9
Cross Arm For LA and DO ( 100 x 50 x 6.4 x 2348 mm )
All Dimension
mm
in
DWG. 15H
Dia. 18
16881748
1718
2000
2252
2312
2282
2348
Approved by
Checked by
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-74
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-75
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-76
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-77
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-78
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-79
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-80
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-81
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03
Section VI-D: Drawing and Material Lists VID-82
GSEEP/W/ICB-04-2072/73-03